Integrated customer interface for web based communications network management

(57) Abstract

A web-based, integrated customer interface system (30) for enabling customer management of their communication network assets. A web-based GUI (20) enables a customer to interact with one or more network management resources and telecommunication services. The integrated interface system (30) includes: 1) a customer's network report management; 2) a centralized in-box system for online notifications to client workstation; 3) a real-time network services monitoring system; 4) broadband system for presenting physical and logical views of data networks and performance information; 5) a toll-free network management system enabling customization of 800/8xx toll free number routing; 6) Outbound Network Management (ONM); 7) packet-switched events monitoring; 8) a trouble ticket tool; 9) web-based invoice reporting for access to billing information; 10) web-based call manager; 11) on-line order entry and administrative service; 12) system for handling security and authentication.

<img file="CA2304543A1_D0001.tif" />

CA 02304543 2000-03-24 i

DEMANDES OU BREVETS VOLUMINEUX

LA PRÉSENTE PARTIE DE CETTE DEMANDE OU CE BREVET COMPREND PLUS D'UN TOME.

CECI EST LE TOME J__DE

NOTE: Pour les tomes additionels, veuillez contacter le Bureau canadien des brevets

JUMBO APPLICATIONS/PATENTS

THIS SECTION OF THE APPUCATION/PATENT CONTAINS MORE THAN ONE VOLUME

THIS IS VOLUME ___OF____

NOTE: For additional volumes please contact'thé Canadian Patent Office

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

INTEGRATED CUSTOMER INTERFACE FOR WEB BASEP COMMUNICATIONS NETWQRK J5ANAGEMENT

The present invention relates generally to information delivery systems over the public Internet, and, particularly, to a WWW/Internet-based, telecommunications data management service for customers of telecommunications service providers.

In conventional customer enabled reporting and data management systems, a connection is made with a large legacy system via a dial-up connection from a customer owned personal computer or work station. This connection frequently, although not always, emulates a terminal addressable by the legacy system. The dial-up access requires custom software on the customer workstation to provide dial-up services, communication services, emulation and/or translation services and generally some resident custom form of the legacy application to interface with the mid range or main frame computer running the legacy system.

There are several problems associated with this approach:

First, the aforementioned software is very hardware specific, and customers generally have a wide range of workstation vendors, which requires extensive inventory for distribution, and generally, intensive customer hand holding through initial setup and installation before reliable and secure sessions are possible. If the customer hardware platform changes through an upgrade, most of these issues need renegotiation.

Secondly, dial-up, modem, and communications software interact with each other in many ways which are not always predictable to a custom application,

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT7US98/20173 requiring extensive trouble shooting and problem solving for an enterprise desiring to make the legacy system available to the customer, particularly where various telephone exchanges, dialing standards or signal standards are involved.

Third, when an enterprise desires to make more than one system available to the customer, the custom application for one legacy system is not able to connect to a different legacy system, and the customer must generally logoff and logon to switch from one to the other. The delivery technology used by the two legacy systems may be different, requiring different interface standards, and different machine level languages may be used by the two systems, as for example, the 96 character EBCDIC language used by IBM, and the 127 character ASCII language used by contemporary personal computers.

Finally, the security and entitlement features of the various legacy systems may be completely different, and vary from system to system and platform to platform.

In the context of telecommunications services and products offered by large telecommunications network service providers for their customers, the assignee of the present invention, MCI, has deployed an MCI Serviceview (MSV) platform comprising a number of independent legacy systems enabling dial-up connectivity for those customers desiring to obtain the following network management service and reporting data pertaining to their telecommunications networks: priced call detail data and reporting; toll-free network manager 800NM call routing data; outbound network management data; trouble ticket information; fault

-2SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 manager alarms. Limited interactive toll free network control is additionally supported whereby customers may change the configuration of their toll-free networks and virtual networks, i.e., Vnet networks. In addition to the MSV platform, the present assignee has implemented a variety of stand alone applications including: a Traffic View system enabling customers to perform real-time network traffic monitoring of their toll-free networks, and obtain near-real time call detail data and reports, and, a Hyperscope reporting system for providing reports on the performance of customers' Broadband (data) networks.

More particularly, MCI's Serviceview platform (MSV) provides for the generation of Toll-free Network Management data, priced call detail (Perspective) data for usage analysis and trending, each of which requires a different reporting mechanism due to the nature of the data being presented. Such reporting systems typically do not provide any report customization or presentation options for the customer, and any reporting customization is provided by an application specific program running on the client workstation. Furthermore, such systems do not readily provide for the scheduling of periodic or ad hoc oneshot reports.

Thus, what is needed is a comprehensive system that facilitates and simplifies customer access to, and management of, all of their telecommunications network assets and enterprise telecommunications network management products and services to which they have subscribed.

-3SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

The rapid adoption and use of the internet for data exchange has prompted a desire on the part of customers to access their data over the internet.

The popularity of the public Internet provides a measure of platform independence for the customer, as the customer can run their own Internet web-browser and utilize their own platform connection to the Internet to enable service. This resolves many of the platform hardware and connectivity issues in the customers favor, and lets the customer choose their own platform and operating system. Web-based programs can minimize the need for training and support since they utilize existing client software which the user has already installed and already knows how to use, i.e., the browser. Further, if the customer later changes that platform, then, as soon as the new platform is Internet enabled, service is restored to the customer. The connectivity and communications software burden is thus resolved in favor of standard and readily available hardware and the browser and dialup software used by the public Internet connection.

An Internet delivered paradigm obviates many of the installation and configuration problems involved with initial setup and configuration of a customer workstation, since the custom application required to interface with the legacy system can be delivered via the public Internet and run within a standard webbrowser, reducing application compatibility issues to browser compatibility issues.

For the enterprise, the use of off-the-shelf web browsers by the customer significantly simplifies the enterprise burden by limiting the client development side to screen layouts and data

-4SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 presentation tools that use a common interface enabled by the web browser. Software development and support resources are thus available for the delivery of the enterprise legacy services and are not consumed by a need for customer support at the work station level.

It would be highly desirable to provide an integrated system that provides for secure connectivity to telecommunications enterprise legacy systems over the public Internet. The public Internet provides access connectivity world wide via the TCP/IP protocol, without need to navigate various disparate security protocols, telephone exchanges, dialing standards or signal standards, thereby providing a measure of platform independence for the customer.

Furthermore, it would be desirable to provide an Intranet/Internet/Web-based reporting system that provides a common GUI enabling both report requesting, customizing, scheduling and viewing of various types of data from different back-end telecommunications service and applications.

It would also be highly desirable to provide a Intranet/Internet/Web-based data management system infrastructure capable of providing telecommunications products and services data to customer's over the Intranet.

It is therefore desired to provide connectivity to enterprise legacy systems providing telecommunications network management services over the public Internet, as the Internet provides access connectivity world wide via the TCP/IP protocol, without need to navigate various telephone exchanges, dialing standards or signal standards.

-5SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCI7US98/20173

The present invention is directed to a Webbased, integrated customer interface system for telecommunications network management. The customer interface system is provided with a graphical user interface for enabling a user to interact with one or more telecommunications network management services provided by remote servers located in a telecommunications service provider's Intranet, and utilizes a Web paradigm to allow easy and convenient access to all of the telecommunications services from the user's perspective.

In the preferred embodiment, the telecommunications products and services delivered to a client workstation having the integrated customer interface include: 1) report requestor, report viewer, and report management applications enabling a customer to request, specify, customize and schedule delivery of reports pertaining to customer's real time unpriced call detail data and priced call detail data; 2) centralized inbox system for providing on-line reporting, presentation, and notifications to a client workstation from one or more Intranet application services over an Internet/Intranet network; 3) a realtime monitoring system enabling a customer to monitor call detail statistics and call detail data pertaining to their special service network usage, e.g., 800/8xx toll-free networks; 4) a toll-free network management system enabling customers to define their own 800/8xx toll free number routing plans via the Web/Internet, enabling customers to change and modify their existing 800/δχχ toll free number routing plans, and, temporarily change the percent allocation of traffic for a particular 800/8xx toll free number based on

-6SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 25)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 certain criteria; 5) an outbound network management system enabling customers to manage and track features and services associated with their virtual networks (Vnet) including management of calling party number orders, dialing plan orders, calling card number management, and ID code sets orders; 6) an event monitor system for providing customers with various reports and real-time alarm information relating to their switched-circuit (data and voice) networks in real time or near-real time, including: provision of physical and logical views of customers' Broadband data networks, physical and logical view of Broadband network alarms, and physical and logical performance information relating to the circuits which comprise a customer's Broadband data network, e.g., frame-relay, thus, allowing customers to make informed network management decisions in controlling their business telecommunications networks; 7) a trouble ticket tool enabling a customer to open and monitor trouble tickets relating to network events on an enterprise network; 8) a Web-based invoice reporting system allowing the customers access to their billing and invoice reports associated with network services provided to a customer; 9) a web-based call manager service enabling call center customers to control delivery of toll free calls from the telecommunications enterprise network to call centers, including call centers having multiple automatic call distributors (ACD's); 10) an Internet online order entry and administration service to enable customers to manage their telecommunications accounts; and, 11) a system for handling security and authentication requests from both client and server

-7SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT7US98/20173 side of the applications implementing the suite of telecom products and services.

Integrated within the customer interface system is an application backplane unit for controlling and managing the overall user interface system to a number of Web enabled application services. By invoking the backplane unit a user may receive a number of disparate services available from the remote servers .

Each remote telecom service provided includes its own user interface unit, referred to as a client application, independently implemented of one another and the backplane. Although the client applications are independently developed as separate modules, the interface of the present invention integrates the client applications into one unified system, allowing users to access the individual client applications via the backplane unit. Thus, the present invention provides interoperability between each of the client applications and the backplane, as well as among each of the client applications.

Accordingly, the present invention provides an integrated customer interface and web-based delivery system for delivering to customers a number of telecommunications products and services available from remote servers, wherein separate client applications may communicate with one another and with the backplane unit.

Thus, in accordance with the principles of the invention, there is provided an integrated system for providing a plurality of communications network management services and products to a customer over the public internet, the network management services and

-8SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 products accessible from a client workstation employing a client browser associated with said customer and capable of receiving web based communications from a communications service enterprise, the system comprising: one or more secure web servers for managing one or more secure client sessions over the internet in response to customer entry into the system, each secure web server supporting secure communications with the client workstation; a plurality of client applications integrated within a web-based GUI and downloaded from a secure web server according to predetermined customer entitlements, each client application for providing a customer interface integrated within the web based GUI and enabling interactive communications with one or more communications network management resources provided by the communications service enterprise via a secure web server; and, each secure web server supporting communication of request messages entered by the customer via the customer interface to the one or more network management resources capable of providing a desired communications network management function, wherein one or more remote application resource processes the request messages and provides responses to the one or more secure web servers for secure uploading to the client browser and display via the integrated customer interface, thereby enabling a customer to manage its communications network assets.

Advantageously, the integrated customer interface implementing an Internet delivered paradigm for telecom network management services obviates many

-9SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 of the installation and configuration problems involved with initial setup and configuration of a dial-up customer workstation, since the custom application required to interface with the legacy system can be delivered via the public Internet and run within a standard web-browser, reducing application compatibility issues to browser compatibility issues.

Further features and advantages of the invention will become more readily apparent from a consideration of the following detailed description set forth with reference to the accompanying drawings, which specify and show preferred embodiments of the invention, wherein like elements are designated by identical references throughout the drawings; and in which:

Figure 1 illustrates the software architecture component comprising a three-tiered structure;

Figure 2 is a diagrammatic overview of the software architecture of the networkMCI Interact system;

Figure 3 is an illustrative example of a backplane architecture schematic;

Figure 4 depicts the logon process for the nMCI Interact system;

Figures 5(a) and 5(b) illustrate example nMCI Interact system web home pages presenting customerselectable telecommunications network services to which the client/customer is entitled;

Figure 6 is a flow diagram illustrating the backplane logic process when a user selects a service;

-10SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

Figure 7 illustrates an architectural overview of the StarOE order entry component of the nMCI Interact system;

Figure 8 is an input process flow diagram, illustrating inputs to the StarOE order entry component of the nMCI Interact system;

Figure 9 is an output process flow diagram, illustrating outputs from the StarOE order entry component of the nMCI Interact system;

Figure 10 is a block diagram depicting the physical architecture of the StarWRS component of networkMCI Interact Reporting system;

Figures 11(a) - 11(c) illustrate flow diagrams depicting the report request/scheduling process 600 implemented by StarWRS Report Manager and Report Requestor tools of the invention;

Figures 12(a)-12(h) illustrate various examples of report requestor screen dialogs enabling user customization of report requests.

Figure 13(a) illustrates an example browser based message center screen dialog;

Figure 13 (b) illustrates an example report viewer dialog box used for requesting view of available generated reports;

Figure 14(a) illustrates the primary components implemented in the StarODS priced reporting component 400;

Figure 14(b) depicts generally the process performed by the DSS in fulfilling a priced reporting request received from StarWRS;

-11SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

Figures 15(a)-15(c) illustrate the end-to-end process 600 for fulfilling priced call detail data report reques t;

Figure 16 illustrates an example screen display when the StarOE application is launched;

Figure 17 is a sample StarOE screen 1540 for adding and modifying reporting options which are used by the StarWRS;

Figure 18 illustrates the unpriced call detail reporting and real-time traffic monitoring component 500 for nMCI Interact system;

Figure 19 is an general flow diagram of the process by which the TVS server 550 gets data.

Figure 20 is a detailed flow diagram depicting the internal TVS server processes for receiving customer TVS enablement data from order entry and CORE systems;

Figure 21 is a high-level diagram depicting TCR data flow between processes internal to the TVS server;

Figure 22 is a high-level flow diagram depicting TVS unpriced call detail data report generation process;

Figures 23 (a)-23(b) illustrate flow charts describing the real-time monitoring process of the invention;

Figures 23(c)-23 (j) illustrate example screen displays illustrating the real-time monitoring (RTM) system functionality of the nMCI Interact.

Figure 24 illustrates the particular methodology employed for periodically updating a Web page with updated statistical data;

-12SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

Figure 25(a) illustrates the high-level design of the Service Inquiry application architecture 2200;

Figures 25(c)-(d) illustrates the Service Inquiry application server architecture 36 interfacing with the Legacy Backend 40(a), CSM/SI through Requester and Receiver objects;

Figures 25(d)-25(m) illustrate examples of SI application dialog windows enabling user creation and querying of trouble tickets;

Figure 25(n) illustrates domain object model (DOM) 2600 implemented in Service Inquiry;

Figure 26 is a general block diagram depicting the physical architecture of the TFNM system components;

Figures 27(a)-27(c) illustrate exemplary screens providing TFNM functionality through option menus ;

Figure 27(d) illustrates an example display when the File/Select Corp ID menu option of Figure 27(a) is selected;

Figure 27(e) illustrates an exemplar screen display depicting a hierarchical tree view of an example toll-free number routing plan;

Figure 27(f) illustrates an example IMPL dialog screen enabling the user to generate a TEMP IMPL/IMPL order for a desired Corp Id;

Figure 27(g) illustrates an example QUIK dialog screen enabling the user to generate a TEMP QUIK/QUIK order for a desired Corp Id;

Figure 27(h) illustrates an exemplar screen display showing the results of an order query;

-13SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

Figure 27 (i) illustrates an exemplary screen display showing the options for changing existing network plan routing orders;

Figure 28 is a block diagram depicting the physical architecture of the ONM system 200 of the invention;

Figures 29(a)-29 (p) illustrate various examples of ONM web page screen dialogs enabling user interaction with Outbound Network management system?

Figure 30 is a detailed block diagram depicting the physical architecture of the Broadband reporting system component of the present invention;

Figure 31 illustrates those components utilized for Broadband performance reporting;

Figures 32(a)-32(b) illustrate the flow diagrams depicting the Broadband system report creation process 300;

Figure 33 illustrates a process flow diagram depicting various Broadband reporting data retrieval process ;

Figures 34 (a) - 34 (g) depict example graphic reports relating to a customer's Frame Relay (Broadband) network;

Figures 35(a)-35(b) illustrate two example views presented by the Broadband map viewer;

Figure 36 is a block diagram illustrating an overview of the event monitor component of the nMCI Interact System;

Figure 37 illustrates an example of a backend configuration for the fault management system;

Figure 38 illustrates an architectural view of a fault management host;

-14SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

Figure 39 is a high level logic flowchart depicting the operation of the event monitor component of the nMCI Interact System;

Figure 40 illustrates a high level overview of the call manager system environment;

Figure 41 illustrates call manager webstation component architecture of the nMCI Interact system, showing interconnections among the components;

Figure 42 illustrates the objects making up the client interface code, in one embodiment of the call manager system;

Figure 43 illustrates one embodiment of the software architecture showing communications between the client 20 and the call manager web server 1132 and its components;

Figure 44 illustrates an example of call manager webstation application physical architecture when one or more call manager web servers 1132 bypass the CMIDS component 1140;

Figure 45 is an example of a CMIDS conceptual model 1140 providing details of the CMIDS software components;

Figure 46 illustrates a back-end process flow for the call manager system component of the present invention;

Figure 47 illustrates an application-level process flow 1250 for the call manager system component of the present invention;

Figure 48 illustrates an example of a call manager webstation application screen including the toolbar and the route writing palette;

Figure 49 shows an example of a system status display;

-15SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

Figure 50 illustrates an example of a ACD collector administration function screen displayed for providing the user with the ability to view, create, delete and edit ACD collectors;

Figure 51 illustrates an architectural schematic of the online invoicing system 1300 component of nMCI Interact?

Figure 52 is a flow diagram illustrating an online invoicing process flow;

Figure 53(a) is a sample criteria screen launched from the nMCI Interact home page;

Figure 53 (b) is a sample screen displaying a list of invoice reports;

Figure 54 is a sample screen displaying an invoice document generated by the online invoicing system component of the invention;

Figure 55 is a flow diagram illustrating an online invoicing back-end server process flow 1400 during document indexing and storing;

Figure 56 is a flow diagram illustrating an online invoicing back-end server process flow when responding to client requests for document presentation?

Figure 57 is a schematic illustration of the message format passed from the user workstation 20 to the secure web server 24 over the public internet;

Figure 58 is a data flow diagram illustrating the present invention's process flow during logon, entitlement request/response, heartbeat transmissions and logoff procedures; and

Figure 59 is a data flow diagram for various transactions communicated in the nMCI Interact system;

-16SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

<img file="CA2304543A1_D0002.tif" />

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

Figure 60 is a diagram depicting the physical network architecture of the nMCI Interact system of the present invention ;

Figures 61(a) is a schematic illustration showing the message format passed between the Dispatcher server and the application specific proxy; and Figures 61(b) is a schematic illustration of the message format passed between the application specific proxy back to the Dispatcher server.

The present invention is directed to a Webbased, telecommunications network application delivery system for delivering an integrated suite of customer network management tools to customers of telecommunications service providers using a Web browser paradigm. The integrated suite of customer network management tools described herein and provided by the assignee of the present invention, is collectively referred to as the networkMCI Interact system (nMCI Interact). Such an integrated suite of Web-based interactive applications provides all of the tools necessary to enable customers to manage their telecommunication assets, quickly and securely, from anywhere in the world.

The nMCI Interact system architecture is basically organized as a set of common components comprising the following:

1) a software architecture detailing the client and server based aspect of nMCI Interact;

2) a network architecture defining the physical network needed to satisfy the security and data volume requirements of the networkMCI System;

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 25)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

3) a data architecture detailing the back-end or data sources for.the networkMCI reporting system; and

4) an infrastructure covering security, order entry, fulfillment, billing, self-monitoring, metrics and support. Each of these common component areas will be discussed in further detail herein.

Figure 1 is a diagrammatic illustration of the software architecture in which the present invention functions. A first tier of software services are resident on a customer work station 20 and provides customer access to the enterprise system, having one or more downloadable application objects 10 directed to front end business logic and application services, a backplane service layer 12 for managing sessions, one or more presentation services objects for the presentation of telecom network management options and customer requested telecommunications network management data in a browser recognizable format, and a customer supplied browser for presentation of customer options and data to the customer and for internet communications over the public Internet.

A second or middle tier 15 is provided, having secure web servers and back end services to provide applications that establish user sessions, govern user authentication and their entitlements, and communicate with adaptor programs to simplify the interchange of data across the network.

A back end or third tier 18 having applications directed to legacy back end services includes database storage and retrieval systems and one or more database servers for accessing system resources from one or more legacy systems.

-18SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

Generally, the customer or client tier or workstation 20 is client software capable of providing a platform-independent, browser-based, consistent user interface implementing objects programmed to provide a reusable and common GUI abstraction and problem-domain abstractions. More specifically, the client-tier software is created and distributed as a set of Java classes including the applet classes to provide an industrial strength, object-oriented environment over the Internet. Application-specific classes are designed to support the functionality and server interfaces for each application with the functionality delivered through the system being of two-types: 1) cross-product, for example, inbox and reporting functions, and 2) product specific, for example, Service Inquiry, Toll Free Network Management (TFNM) or Call Manager (CM) functions. The system is capable of delivering to customers the functionality appropriate to their product mix.

Figure 2 is a diagrammatic illustration of the network and platform components of the nMCI Interacts system, including: the Customer workstation 20; the Demilitarized Zone 17 (DMZ); Web Servers cluster 24; the MCI Intranet Dispatcher/Proxy Servers cluster 30; and the MCI Intranet Application servers 40, warehouses, legacy systems, etc.

The customer workstation 20 is browser enabled and includes client applications responsible for presentation and front-end services. Its functions include providing a user interface to various MCI services and supporting communications with MCI's Intranet web server cluster 24. As illustrated in Figure 2, the client tier software is responsible for

-19SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 presentation services to the customer and generally includes a web browser 14 and additional objectoriented programs residing in the client workstation platform 20. The client software is generally organized into a component architecture with each component generally comprising a specific application, providing an area of functionality. The applications generally are integrated using a backplane services layer 12 which provides a set of services to the application objects which provide the front end business logic and manages their launch.

As will be described, each of the nMCI

Internet suite of network management applications implements a set of common objects (CO) that minimizes the replication of code, and provides a framework in which a family of internet applications may be managed and created including: communications, I/O services to local resources, user authentication, internationalization, common look and feel, application management, and a model view controller (MVC) framework. The primary common object services for each of the suite of applications include: graphical user interface (GUI); application launch; window navigation among applications; inter-application communications; printing; user identity, session management, authentication, and entitlements; data import and export; logging and statistics; error handling; version management; and messaging services.

As shown in Figure 2, the aforesaid objects communicate data by establishing a secure TCP messaging session with one of the DMZ networkMCI Interact Web servers 24 via an Internet secure communications path 22 established, preferably, with a secure sockets SSL

-20SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 version of HTTPS. The DMZ networkMCI Interact Web servers 24 function to decrypt the client message, preferably via the SSL implementation, and unwrap the session key and verify the users session. After establishing that the request has come from a valid user and mapping the request to its associated session, the DMZ Web servers 24 will re-encrypt the request using symmetric encryption and forward it over a second secure socket connection 23 to the dispatch server 26 inside the enterprise Intranet.

As will be hereinafter described in greater detail, a networkMCI Interact session is designated by a logon, successful authentication, followed by use of server resources, and logoff. However, the world-wide web communications protocol uses HTTP, a stateless protocol, each HTTP request and reply is a separate TCP/IP connection, completely independent of all previous or future connections between the same server and client. The present invention is implemented with a secure version of HTTP such as S-HTTP or HTTPS, and preferably utilizes the SSL implementation of HTTPS. The preferred embodiment uses SSL which provides a cipher spec message which provides server authentication during a session. The preferred embodiment further associates a given HTTPS request with a logical session which is initiated and tracked by a cookie jar server 32 to generate a cookie which is a unique server-generated key that is sent to the client along with each reply to a HTTPS request. The client holds the cookie and returns it to the server as part of each subsequent HTTPS request. As desired, either the Web servers 24, the cookie jar server 32 or the Dispatch Server 26, may maintain the

-21SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT7US98/20173 cookie jar to map these keys to the associated session. A separate cookie jar server 32, as illustrated in Figure 2 has been found desirable to minimize the load on the dispatch server 26. A new cookie will be generated when the response to the HTTPS request is sent to the client. This form of session management also functions as an authentication of each HTTPS request, adding an additional level of security to the overall process.

As illustrated in Figure 2, after one of the DMZ Web servers 24 decrypts and verifies the user session, it forwards the message through a firewall 25b over a TCP/IP connection 23 to the dispatch server 26 on a new TCP socket while the original socket 22 from the browser is blocking, waiting for a response. The dispatch server 26 will unwrap an outer protocol layer of the message from the DMZ services cluster 24, and will reencrypt the message with symmetric encryption and forward the message to an appropriate application proxy via a third TCP/IP socket 27. While waiting for the proxy response all three of the sockets 22, 23, 27 will be blocking on a receive. Specifically, once the message is decrypted, the wrappers are examined to reveal the user and the target middle-tier (Intranet application) service for the request. A first-level validation is performed, making sure that the user is entitled to communicate with the desired service. The user's entitlements in this regard are fetched by the dispatch server 26 from StarOE server 39 at logon time and cached.

If the requestor is authorized to communicate with the target service, the message is forwarded to the desired service's proxy. Each application proxy is

-22SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 an application specific daemon which resides on a specific Intranet server, shown in Figure 2 as a suite of mid-range servers 30. Each Intranet application server of suite 30 is generally responsible for providing a specific back-end service requested by the client, and, is additionally capable of requesting services from other Intranet application servers by communicating to the specific proxy associated with that other application server. Thus, an application server not only can offer its browser a client to server interface through the proxy, but also may offer all its services from its proxy to other application servers. In effect, the application servers requesting service are acting as clients to the application servers providing the service. Such mechanism increases the security of the overall system as well as reducing the number of interfaces.

The network architecture of Figure 2 may also include a variety of application specific proxies having associated Intranet application servers including: a StarOE proxy for the StarOE application server 39 for handling authentication order entry/billing; an Inbox proxy for the Inbox application server 31, which functions as a container for completed reports, call detail data and marketing news messages, a Report Manager Proxy capable of communicating with a system-specific Report Manager server 32 for generating, managing and scheduling the transmission of customized reports including, for example: call usage analysis information provided from the StarODS server 33; network traffic analysis/monitor information provided from the Traffic view server 34; virtual data network alarms and performance reports provided by

-23SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

Broadband server 35; trouble tickets for switching, transmission and traffic faults provided by Service Inquiry server 36; and toll free routing information provided by Toll Free Network Manager server 37.

As partially shown in Figure 2, it is understood that each Intranet server of suite 30 communicates with one or several consolidated network databases which include each customer's network management information and data. In the present invention the Services Inquiry server 36 includes communication with MCI's Customer Service Management legacy platform 40(a). Such network management and customer network data is additionally accessible by authorized MCI management personnel. As shown in Figure 2, other legacy platforms 40(b), 40(c) and 40(d) may also communicate individually with the Intranet servers for servicing specific transactions initiated at the client browser. The illustrated legacy platforms 40(a)-(d) are illustrative only and it is understood other legacy platforms may be integrated into the network architecture illustrated in Figure 2 through an intermediate midrange server 30.

Each of the individual proxies may be maintained on the dispatch server 26, the related application server, or a separate proxy server situated between the dispatch server 26 and the midrange server 30. The relevant proxy waits for requests from an application client running on the customer's workstation 20 and then services the request, either by handling them internally or forwarding them to its associated Intranet application server 30. The proxies additionally receive appropriate responses back from an Intranet application server 30. Any data returned from

-24SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 the Intranet application server 30 is translated back to client format, and returned over the internet to the client workstation 20 via the Dispatch Server 26 and at one of the web servers in the DMZ Services cluster 24 and a secure sockets connection. When the resultant response header and trailing application specific data are sent back to the client browser from the proxy, the messages will cascade all the way back to the browser 14 in real time, limited only by the transmission latency speed of the network.

The networkMCI Interact middle tier software includes a communications component offering three (3) types of data transport mechanisms: 1) Synchronous which is used for situations in which data will be returned by the application server 30 quickly; 2) Asynchronous which is used for situations in which there may be a long delay in application server 30 response; and 3) Bulk transfer which is used for large data transfers.

The DMZ Web servers 24 are found in a special secure network area set aside from the Intranet to prevent potentially hostile customer access. All DMZ equipment is physically isolated and firewalled as illustrated at 25(a), 25(b) from the company Intranet. Similarly, the DMZ equipment is firewalled and obscured from hostile attacks from the public Internet, except for limited web browser access to the web servers which are located in the DMZ. The customer's web browser connects to a web server in the DMZ which in turn connects to the Dispatcher server 26 which acts as a proxy to extract select information from the midrange servers 30. A user may not directly connect to any enterprise server in the enterprise intranet, thus

-25SUBSTFTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PC17US98/20173 ensuring internal company system security and integrity.

The DMZ also isolates the company Intranet from the public Internet because the web servers 24 located in the DMZ never store or compute actual customer sensitive data. The web servers only put the data into a form suitable for display by the customer's web browser. Since the DMZ web servers 24 do not store customer data, there is a much smaller chance of any customer information being jeopardized in case of a security breach.

Client browser application

As mentioned, one component of the nMCI Interact system is the client-tier software component which provides the integrated and unified interface to each of the telecommunications network management services available to a user. As shown in Figure 3, the system of the present invention implements an application backplane 12, a single object which keeps track of all the client applications, and which has capabilities to start, stop, and provide references to any one of the client applications. The application backplane 12 is typically implemented as a Java applet and is launched when a Web page is retrieved via a URL pointing to the enterprise's Web site. The client applications typically comprise graphical user interface programs which enable a user to interact with one or more Web enabled remote services.

The backplane 12 and the client applications use a browser 14 such as the Microsoft Explorer versions 4.0.1 or higher for an access and distribution mechanism. Although the backplane is initiated with a

-26SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 browser 14, the client applications are generally isolated from the browser in that they typically present their user interfaces in a separate frame, rather than sitting inside a Web page.

The backplane architecture is implemented with several primary classes. These classes include COBackPlane, COApp, COAppImpl, COParm. and COAppFrame classes. COBackPlane 12 is an application backplane which launches the applications 54a, 54b, typically implemented as COApp. COBackPlane 12 is generally implemented as a Java applet and is launched by the Web browser 14. This backplane applet is responsible for launching and closing the COApps.

When the backplane is implemented as an applet, it overrides standard Applet methods init(), start (), stopO and run(). In the init() method, the backplane applet obtains a COUser user context object. The COUser object holds information such as user profile, applications and their entitlements. The user's configuration and application entitlements provided in the COUser context are used to construct the application toolbar and Inbox applications. When an application toolbar icon is clicked, a particular COApp is launched by launchAppt) method. The launched application then may use the backplane for interapplication communications, including retrieving Inbox data.

The COBackPlane 12 includes methods for providing a reference to a particular COApp, for interoperation. For example, the COBackPlane class provides a getAppO method which returns references to application objects by name. Once retrieved in this

-27SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 manner, the application object's public interface may be used directly.

COApp is the base interface for the applications. The applications, e.g., Service Inquiry 54a or Call Manager 54b, generally have their startup code and inter-application interface in a class which implements COApp. Generally, two classes are available for the applications, COAppImpl or COApplet. Alternately, they may provide their own implementation of the interface. In the preferred embodiment, applications typically extend COAppImpl.

COAppImpl is an applet-like class, but it does not derive from java.applet.Applet nor from java.awt.Panel. By not deriving from Applet, the applications may be launched at any time without browser having to be pointed to specific page, and frees the applications from running within the browser frame. Classes derived from COAppImpl are created, launched, stopped, and destroyed by the COBackPlane 12. This provides a tight and controlled integration by the system of the present invention.

The COApplet class, on the other hand, extends the Applet class and is intended to be launched by the browser from an HTML <Applet> tag. Extension from Applet is provided for applications needing more isolation from the present integrated system, or requiring a separate browser-based display space. The COApplet class implements most of the COApp interface by forwarding it to a contained COAppImpl object.

COAppFrame 56a, 56b is a desktop window created and used by a COApp to contain its user interface. The COAppFrame 56a, 56b is a separate window from the Web browser 50. Generally, the

-28SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

COAppFrame 56a, 56b has a menu, toolbar, and status bar. The COAppFrame's attachToViewArea() method may be used to paste a COView object 60a, 60b, 60c into a COAppFrame 56a, 56b. The COView class is an extension of java.awt.Panel. It provides a general purpose display space and container for an application's visual representation. Application classes typically extend the COView class to implement their presentation logic. COApp may use none, one, or many COAppFrames 56a, 56b.

COParm is a generic data class used to pass parameters between applications. COApp interface provides a public method for passing COParm message objects, for example, public void processMessage (COParm message), which may be used to pass messages between applications. The COParm class including a set of name-value pairs which are used to present information or requests.

Logon

As illustrated in Figure 4, a logon process for the nMCI Interact's integrated customer interface of the present invention starts with the browser launch as indicated at step 60, and the entry of the enterprise URL, such as HTTPS://www.enterprise.com, as indicated at step 62. Following a successful connection, an SSL handshake protocol may be initiated at this point as indicated at step 63. As will be explained in greater detail herein, when a SSL client and server first start communicating, they agree on a protocol version, select cryptographic algorithms, authenticate the server (or optionally authenticate each other) and use public-key encryption techniques to generate shared secrets.

-29SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

After successful SSL handshake at step 63, an HTML file invoking and an associated logon applet is downloaded with software tools and common objects in steps 64, 66, to present a web page including name and password entry fields for user to enter. The user is then prompted to enter name and password on the Web page. If the nMCI Interact system determines that the software files including classes for initiating a session, have been already downloaded, for example, from a previous session, the steps 62, 64, 66 are skipped.

The logon applet checks for the name/password entry and instantiates a session object in step 72, communicating the name/password pair. The session object sends a message including the name/password to a remote server for user validation in step 74. When the user is properly authenticated by the server in step 76, another Web page having backplane object is downloaded in steps 78, 80, 84. This page is referred to as a home page. At the same time, all the application software objects are downloaded in step 82. If the system of the present invention determines that the backplane and application files have been already downloaded, the steps 80, 82, 84 are not performed. The backplane object is then instantiated in step 86.

As will be explained, the backplane communicates with a remote order entry server component (StarOE) server 39 (Figure 2) to retrieve the user's entitlements in step 88. The entitlements represent specific services the user has subscribed and has privilege to access. It also describes what entitlements the user may have within any single service. For example, from the COUser context, the

-30SUBSTTTUTE SHEET (RULE 25)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 backplane can obtain the list of applications that the user is entitled to access. In addition, each COApp holds set of entitlements within that application in COAppEntitlements object.

Using the information from the COUser context, the backplane knows which COApps to provide, e.g., which buttons to install in its toolbar. The backplane stores the user specific entitlements in memory for other processes to access. After determining the entitlements, the backplane initiates a new thread and starts an application toolbar in step

90. The application toolbar includes the remote services to which the user has subscribed and may select to run. From the application toolbar, a user is able to select a service to run. Upon user selection, the selection is communicated from the application toolbar to the backplane in steps 92, 94, which then launches the graphical user interface program associated with the selected service. The application toolbar remains on the user display, even after a particular service has been initiated. This is useful when a user desires to start up another remote service directly from having run a previous service because the user then need not retrieve the home page again,

If it is determined that the user entered password is not valid in step 70 or step 76, an attempted logon count is incremented in step 96. If the user's attempted logon count is greater than a predefined allowed number of tries as indicated in step 98, a message is conveyed to the user in step 101 and the user must restart the browser. If the user's attempted logon count is not greater than the predefined allowed number of tries, a failed login

-31SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 message is conveyed to the user in step 102, and the user is prompted to reenter name/password in step 68. If it is determined that the user password has expired, the user is prompted to change the password in step 104. For example, the user may be required to change the password every 30 days for security reasons. Whenever the user changes the password, the new password is transmitted in real time to a server responsible for updating and keeping the password entry for the user. The user than enters the new password in step 104 and continues with the processing described above in step 70.

An illustrative example of the nMCI Interact logon Web page typically includes a name field and a password field for the user to enter. After the user is properly authenticated via the logon page, the nMCI Interact home page is retrieved.

Figures 5(a) and 5(b) illustrate example nMCI Interact home pages, i.e., a Web page having the backplane object 12. The home page 79(a) is downloaded after the authentication via a logon page and provides, for example, a suite 95 of network management reporting applications including: MCI Traffic Monitor application 85; an alarm monitor application 87; a Network Manager application 89 and the Service Inquiry application 91. Access to network functionality is also provided through Report Requester 83, which provides a variety of detailed reports for the client/customer and a Message Center 77 for providing enhancements and functionality to traditional e-mail communications. An application toolbar 71 is also provided that is different from the icons 95 in that the application tool bar remains on a screen, even when the home page

-32SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT7US98/20173

79(a) is no longer displayed. The home page also typically comprises HTML links to other services 96. These services may be new information center, features benefits, or support center for the system of the present invention.

Backplane Logic

Figure 6 is a flow diagram illustrating the backplane logic process when a user selects a service from a home page or the application toolbar. The user initially selects an application in step 110. If the selected application is derived from COAppImpl, the COBackPlane object 12 instantiates the desired application object by name. The COBackPlane 12 also creates a COAppStartThread object to manage the startup of the COAppImpl in step 116. Each COAppImpl is started in it's own thread. COAppStartThread calls the COAppImpl's initO method. Here the COAppImpl typically creates the application-specific classes it needs, including a COAppFrame (or a derived class thereof) if desired. COAppStartThread calls the COApp's start () method. Once the start{) method has completed, the COAppStartThread ends.

If the desired application is derived from java.applet.Applet, a new browser window is created, and directed to the HTML page from which the applet is to be loaded 338. This will cause the browser to load the applet, and call its initO and start () method. In its init() method, the applet obtains a reference to the backplane by calling the static method of the COBackPlane class getBackPlane(). Also in its initO method, the applet notifies the backplane that it has been launched by calling the backplane's registerAppO

-33SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 method. Alternately, if the desired application is an application requiring a direct URL launch from the home page, for example RTM as shown at step 112, the desired application is invoked by retrieving a Web page having the application's URL as shown at step 118.

Each application gets a session identifier in step 120 upon its startup. Should the applications desire to perform some further authentication, they are free to retrieve the COUser object, and perform whatever special authentication they need, without troubling the user to re-enter his/her username and password. During the processing of functions specific to each application, the applications are able to communicate with one another as well as with the backplane by getting a reference to the applications or the backplane and invoking the public interfaces or methods with the reference.

After a user is finished with interacting with COApp, the user requests the selected COApp to exit via a menu selection, clicking on a close box button on a window frame, or a keyboard command, for example. The COApp then requests exit from the COBackPlane. if the selected application is derived from COAppImpl, the COBackPlane creates a COAppStopThread to manage the exit of the COApp. As with startup, each COApp is stopped in its own thread. COAppStopThread calls COApp's stop() method. Typically a COApp would not override this method. It is called for consistency with the applet interface of the COApp class. An applet's stop!) method is called by the Web browser when the Web browser leaves the page from which the applet was loaded, in order to allow the applet to, for instance, stop an animation. For consistency with

-34SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 this model, COApps may use this method to stop longrunning threads. COAppStartThread calls COApp's destroy() method. Here the COApp typically performs resource cleanup routines, including stopping any threads, and calling the dispose () method for any COAppFrame objects.

If the selected application is derived from java. applet. Applet, the Web browser window comprising the page from which the applet was launched is closed. This will cause the applet's stopO method to be called by Web browser. In its stopO method, the applet notifies the backplane that it has been stopped by calling the backplane's deregisterApp() method.

Then a user typically requests logoff via menu, close box, etc. When such a request is received the backplane sends Logoff transaction to the Web Server. The backplane closes toolbar and directs the Web browser to logon URL. Then the backplane exits.

As further shown in Figure 6, the homepage provides links to other Web pages. For example, if help hypertext is selected in step 122 from the application toolbar, a help URL is launched in a new browser window in step 124. Similarly, if customer support hypertext is selected in step 126, a customer support URL is launched in a new browser window in step 128. If a user selects a marketing promotion hypertext in step 130, URL for new product information will be launched in a new browser window in step 132. If a product overview hypertext is selected in step 134, a URL pertaining to the product's features will be launched in a new browser window in step 136. If a user selects home in step 138, the home page will be redisplayed in step 139.

-35SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

User

The present invention also includes a user unit for representing a user of a current session. The user unit is generally implemented as a COUser class extending java.lang.Object. The COUser class object holds information including a user profile, applications and their entitlements. In order to minimize network traffic, the amount of data carried by the COUser is minimal initially, and gets or becomes populated as requests are processed. The requests are generally processed by retrieving infomation from the Order Entry service. The profile infomation is then stored and populated in the COUser object should such infomation be requested again.

A COUser object is created when the user logs in, and holds the username and password of the user as an object in the COClientSession object. The session object is contained within the backplane, which manages the session throughout its lifetime. The code below illustrates how this occurs:

// Within the backplane

COClientSession session = new COClientSession() ;

try {

Session.logon (username, password);

} catch (COClientLogonException e) // Should the User object be required

COUser user = session.getUser ();

The logon method of the COClientSession object communicates with the StarOE (Order Entry) server (Figure 2), a back-end authentication mechanism, for authenticating the user.

-36SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

The COUser that may be obtained from the

COClientSession immediately after the login process is very sparse. It includes a limited set of information such as username, a list of applications that user is entitled to, for example. The details of each entitlement information are retrieved at the time of actual processing with those information.

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

StarOE

As briefly mentioned, the StarOE server 39 of the networkMCI Interact system (Figure 2) is used to order, fulfill, and bill for, as well as administer, the suite of network applications, providing a horizontal service for use by all applications. The applications communicate to StarOE for all authentication, entitlement and system administration as well as order entry services. StarOE centrally processes these service requests for the individual applications by providing all order entry and security 20 information for the networkMCI Interact suite of applications.

The security information which the StarOE maintains and provides describes identification, authentication and access control used in the suite of 25 applications. All access to the networkMCI Interact is controlled by userids and passwords, as explained herein. In addition, individual users are specifically granted access to only the necessary system objects,

i.e., file, programs, menus, reports, etc. Access to 30 these individual objects are based upon the customer privilege models, i.e., entitlements, stored in a StarOE database. Thus, all information regarding customers and their access levels for each product in

-37SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 the suite of network applications to which the customers have subscribed are stored in a customer security profile database local to the StarOE. Accordingly, StarOE provides the ability to prevent unauthorized, non-customer access to networkMCI Interact data and applications; the ability to allow customers to access multiple enterprises with one userid; the ability to restrict authorized users to specific Intranet applications and databases based on applications ordered by the customer; and the ability for users to restrict view and/or update capabilities within an application or data set, i.e., customers may provide or restrict views of their enterprise data to subgroups within their organization.

By utilizing the system of the present invention, customers no longer have to place manual calls to order entry hubs when requesting order transactions. For example, users may be added to the system without an enterprise's support team intervention. In sum, customers may manage their communications services in a secure environment and also, for example, monitor their network traffic via the Internet, as well as have a capability to add products and services to their account, in an automated fashion and all in one session without having to enter and exit the individual application services separately, and without having to contact a customer support representative.

Figure 7 illustrates a general architectural overview of the StarOE component which includes a StarOE server 39 resident in a midrange computer, and an associated client application 154 running in a user platform having a Web browser, hereinafter referred to

-38SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/ÜS98/20173 as a StarOE client application. The StarOE server 39 processes a number of transaction requests relating to authentication and entitlements, from other application services, both from the client and the application server 158 sides of the network. In addition, the

StarOE server 39 receives transaction requests from the StarOE client application. The transactions are typically message driven and comprise requesting transactions and response transactions. The StarOE server 39 responds to the message requests by formulating transaction responses and transmitting them to the requesting servers and clients.

The StarOE client application

The StarOE client application 154 is one of the client browser applications running in the Web browser 14, and provides a Web-based GUI interface implemented accordingly and conforming to the networkMCl Interact GUI interface standard for the integrated suite of customer network management and report applications, as described herein. As described, the StarOE client application 154 is launched at the client initiation by the backplane object and generally includes Java applications and applets for providing a common Web-based GUI for interacting with customers at the front-end side.

When a customer launches the StarOE application from the home page, the main window as illustrated in Figure 16, is presented. From this main 30 window 1500, a customer may select to order and fulfill application services, request user id's, and create user security profiles for the networkMCl Interact suite of applications. The main window 1500 includes a

SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE Zty

-39CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 menu bar 1506 with options to perform various StarOE tasks. The main window also includes a toolbar 1504, common to all networkMCI Interact applications. The toolbar 1504 has buttons that also perform the various StarOE functions. Typically, the user list is presented, i.e., displayed as a tree 1502, within the main window 1500.

The menu options 1506 include: file menu options which includes a select enterprise option for allowing administrators to open a user list for a different enterprise, or add a new enterprise to their enterprise list, print option, and exit option which shuts down the StarOE application; edit menu option which includes add new application, modify, and delete options; options menu which enables a global security setup for the toll free manager application; view menu which includes options to refresh the screen by retrieving the latest user list for the opened enterprise from the StarOE server and displaying the list on the screen, to expand all nodes in the user list, and to collapse all nodes in the user list; and help menu option which launches the help engine with StarOE help text. The toolbar 1504 also includes the options for a select enterprise, refresh, expand all, collapse all, print and help options.

A typical process flow logic for StarOE client application starts with the home page launching the StarOE client and passing a reference to a common user information object. This object includes the user id, and the default enterprise for that user. The main window 1500 having the menu options 1506 and the toolbar 1504 is then presented. The StarOE client application then sends a transaction message get

-40SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 25)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

StarOE security including the user id, enterprise id, and the StarOE application code in the message. The StarOE server 39 returns racf id, an access level representing whether the user is an external admin, a member of an account team, an internal admin, or a customer support admin, for example. If the user that launches the StarOE application is an external admin, the user list is displayed immediately since external administrators may view only one enterprise. For external administrators, an enterprise name is retrieved from the StarOE server 39 by sending and receiving a get user enterprise list transaction request and response.

If the user is not an external administrator, then a dialog is presented for the user to select which enterprise to view. When user selects an enterprise to view, a get user list transaction message having enterprise id is sent to the StarOE server 39 to retrieve a list of user ids, a list of applications for each user, an access type for each application, and reporting types for StarWRS (e.g., Toll Free, Vnet, Vision, CVNS). The client application also sends a get application list transaction message to retrieve from the StarOE server 39 a list of application codes, description, and an application array position. The user list is then displayed within the main window as shown at 1502.

Every user list has a New User node 1502a as the first node under an enterprise 1502b. This node may be selected to order a new user. An existing user node 1502c may be selected to edit and add new applications for that user. When an existing user node 1502c is selected, the edit/add new application options

-41SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCTAJS98/20173 on the menu 1506 is enabled and disabled according to what applications the user already has. An existing user application node 1502d may be selected to edit/modify/delete options within the application.

With regard to user selection of the select enterprise menu option or toolbar button in Figure 16, the browser displays the web page having a dialog box which enables an administrator to work with a different enterprise, as well as add an enterprise to their enterprise list and additionally includes the ability to set up new users or modify various options available to existing users.

During the StarOE add or modify procedure described above, security information regarding customer entitlements for application services may also be initialized. For example, a screen may be presented for setting up Toll Free Network Manager (TFNM) security information and is displayed when TFNM is ordered or modified. Preferably, a user's TFNM security profile includes at least one corp id, with each corp id having an associated racf id. Preferably, a setup security object handles the process of setting up security for each application. A constructor for this object initializes the user id and a modify flag as passed in from the StarOE client application 154. The object retrieves the toll free hierarchy from the StarOE server 39 using the get hierarchy message.

The client application 154 sends the enterprise id, and toll-free flag in the request, and the StarOE server 39 returns the list of toll-free corp ids for the enterprise. if the modify flag is set, a get security message is sent to the server 39 to retrieve the user's TFNM security profile. As a displayed tree

-42SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 structure is loaded with each toll free corp id, racf id is entered by a user. When the submit button is pressed, the setup security object calls its send security method which causes the formatting and sending of setTFNM security message to the StarOE server 39. When the StarOE server 39 receives the message, it sets the security accordingly for the TFNM application.

The StarOE administration component is also utilized to order, for example, to add or modify, various reporting options used during web based report generation by the nMCI Interact StarWRS system as will be described. Figure 17 is a sample StarOE screen 1540 for adding and modifying reporting options which are used by the StarWRS. The StarOE displays the toll free hierarchy for security setup when toll free reporting is ordered or modified. The hierarchy includes a list of corp ids for a given enterprise, with each corp id 1542 having a list of toll free numbers 1544 under it. The list may be displayed in a tree format. The reporting options at the toll free number level include unpriced reports (UR), unpriced call detail (UCD), and real time monitor reports.

Typically, a user's toll free reporting security profile includes at least one toll free number with at least one reporting option associated therewith. The client application 154 generally invokes an object to handle the reporting option changes and passes in the user id and a modify flag. This object then retrieves the toll free hierarchy from the StarOE server 39 using the get hierarchy message. The client application 154 sends the enterprise id, and toll free flag in the request, whereby, the server 39 returns the list of toll free corp ids for the

-43SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

<img file="CA2304543A1_D0003.tif" />

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 enterprise. If a modify flag is set, a get toll-free security message is sent to the server to retrieve the user's toll free security profile.

As each corp id is expanded, a get toll-free numbers message is sent to the server 39 asking for all the numbers for the corp id selected. As each toll free number is added, a search in the user's profile for that number is conducted. If the number is found, the report options are added next to number text as shown at 1546. Furthermore, if the number has been deactivated, a text <inactive>, for example, is added to the display as shown at 1548. The inactive numbers are not modifiable. When the unpriced reports or unpriced call detail check boxes 1541 are changed, the text next to the toll free numbers selected reflects the state of the check box. The check boxes depict report options to which a user has access for toll free numbers. When more than one toll free number is selected, the check boxes are marked unchecked. When a submit button is pressed, the object calls its send security class method which causes the formatting and sending of a set user toll-free security message to the StarOE server 39.

It should be understood that besides performing various order entry and administrative functions for the TFNM application, other application services, including reporting for VNET, Vision, Broadband, Call Manager, and invoice reporting may be ordered and the security information pertaining to each application may be modified in a similar manner.

StarOE client application 154 particularly provides screen displays by invoking associated class objects launched by the backplane unit as described

-44SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 above. The StarOE client application 154 employs a Java application program and is implemented by extending the COApp class, one of common objects provided and utilized in the present invention.

Because the client program 154 is not implemented as an applet, and also because the client program 154 employs the container Frame for customer display windowing purposes, the client program 154 runs, to a degree, independent of the browser within which the backplane is deployed.

Referring back to Figure 7, the StarOE client application interacts with the StarOE server in providing various order entry functions for all applications as described above and, as described herein with reference to the back-end functionality of the nMCI Interact system. Communications between the StarOE client 154 and the server 39 typically use TCP/IP, running a UNIX process listening in on a known TCP port.

In the preferred embodiment, as shown in Figure 7, the StarOE server 39 provides a number of processes for performing a number of specific functions. For example, a fulfillment process monitors new customers being added to the system and notifies a fulfillment house 298 accordingly (Figure 9). The fulfillment house then may send appropriate subscription packages according to the information received from the fulfillment process to the new customer. Another process, a reconciliation process, may handle synchroni-zation of data with a mainframe system database and also with databases associated with the individual fulfilling systems. Yet another process, a billing process, may handle directing

-45SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 billing information to different billing streams 157 (Figure 7).

The StarOE server 39 further maintains a database 160 for storing all the networkMCI Interact users and their security information such as passwords and application entitlements and hierarchies describing the user's access privileges to specific application services/sub-services which may be requested by other application servers and clients in the network. Generally, the hierarchies are customer-defined during the order entry process, and des-cribe the subdivision of calls into nodes arranged in a n-way tree. The networkMCI Interact back-end servers apply the hierarchy definitions to their data at report time when generating reports, typically as queries on a node-bynode basis to the result data set which was extracted using any other criteria supplied. The trees of the hierarchies have essentially arbitrary complexity,

i.e., the number of nodes is unlimited. Each node is assigned calls according to a template of conditions. Conditions may be defined as a combination of one or more ANIs, corp IDs, ID codes, Card numbers, account codes, location/node ids, etc. These filters can be applied at any node in the tree. The hierarchies may be applied as both selection criteria (e.g., report on all calls at these nodes or their descendants, in combination with other criteria) and roll-up targets (e.g., group the results in this report at this level in the tree). These entitlements and hierarchies may be modified via the StarOE client application 154 executed at the customer workstation 20.

Referring to Figure 7, a process running in a StarOE client application process 154 sends transaction

-46SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 request messages via the nMCI Interact infrastructure, comprising, e.g., the web server cluster 24 and a dispatcher server 26 (Figure 2), to the OE server 39. The StarOE server 39 responds to requests by searching the security profile for the information requested, formulating appropriate transaction response messages and transmitting them back to the requesting process. As an example, other during the login procedure, the client login process formulates a transaction message including a user name/password and a validation request for a given customer. The StarOE server 39 looks for the matching name/password pair in the security profile for the customer, and if the name/password pair is found, the server 39 formulates a valid user message response for the login process running in the client platform, including in the message the enterprise id, time zone, user id and password information and transmits the response via TCP/IP back to the login process. When the StarOE server 39 detects that the password has expired, the server 39 notifies the customer, via the client application 154 to change the password. The changed password is sent to the StarOE server 39 formatted in a message interface, change password request, for example. The server 39 upon receiving the message updates the password for the given user in its user profile stored in StarOE database 160, and responds with appropriate return codes to the StarOE client 154. The login process, upon receiving the response may then continue with its normal course of processing.

Another example of a service provided by the StarOE is retrieving an application entitlement list for a given customer. As described briefly above, an -47SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 entitlement describes a privilege or authorization that a customer has. It describes what applications a customer may access and also describes what the customer can do within that appli- cation. In addition, it describes what back-end services that application and customer combination may access. For example, a customer may be entitled to use or access many applications and for each application, the customer can have a different set of entitlements. Thus, entitlements may come in two different sets: a first set specifying what the customer may do within the application, e.g., allow the customer to have update access to a particular view and only read-only access in a different view; and, a second set specifying what back-end services this particular application and customer may access.

As described previously, all the information relating to entitlements for a given customer is stored in customer profile database 160 located with the StarOE server. When the backplane requests via TCP/IP the entitlement transaction, for example, in a get application list request message, the security module retrieves and transmits back via TCP/IP to the backplane the list of authorized applications accessible by a given customer in a transaction response. The backplane uses the list to determine which buttons on the networkMCI Interact home page should be activated, thus controlling access to products. Similarly, individual back-end application servers 158 may make a request for entitlements within that application for a given customer. For example, the reporting component of the networkMCI Interact system, herein referred to as StarWRS web-based

-48SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 2B)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 reporting system which provides a customer with their network priced and un-priced call detail data, generates a request for hierarchy data for Vnet, VISION, CVNS and Toll-free customers whenever reports need be generated. In response, the StarOE re-trieves the corresponding hierarchy data and transmits them in real time to the StarWRS system as will be described.

In providing the authentication, entitlement, and hierarchy information, including those described above, the StarOE server database 160 stores user profiles locally. Additional data needed are typically accessed from the enterprise host systems 159. The StarOE server 39 may be implemented as a concurrent server allowing simultaneous multiple client connections. The server 39 listens on a known port, and when a client connects, the server 39 forks a new process to handle the client connection. The server 39 may also implement a thread to handle each client connection.

The StarOE server 39 is preferably implemented utilizing object oriented programming (OOP). As an example, when a get hierarchy list message is initiated at the client application to invoke retrieval of a toll free corp id list from the server 39, a Hierarchy class may be instantiated which includes a Get() method to determine which Hierarchy product is to be retrieved (e.g., Toll-free, Vnet/CVNS, or Vision) and to return the appropriate information. Another object may be invoked to format the data into a response message and return the message back to the client. As another example, when a get application list request message is initiated at the client application, an Application class may be

-49SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 instantiated which encapsulates the interface into a database table (not shown) having applications information. Particularly, the Get() method in this class accesses the Applications table in the database and returns the list of application codes and their descriptions.

Figure 8 is a high level input process flow diagram, illustrating inputs to the StarOE server 39 of the nMCI Interact system. Through the StarOE server, the integrated interface system of the invention handles a wide variety of key functions for the suite of network applications. Each application will, herein forth, be also referred to as a fulfilling system, having a fulfilling client and a fulfilling server. The system of the present invention handles security and authentication requests from both the client and server sides of each fulfilling system as shown in 282a-d and 284. These requests are automatically generated whenever the customer makes a request of the server. For example, they are generated when a customer clicks on the icon from the homepage (Figure

4) for a service such as TFNM.

In addition, as mentioned, when a customer first logs on, the customer is presented with a dialog box prompting for user ID and password. When the customer clicks a submit button, for example, the backplane (or platform) verifies the customer is valid by inquiring with the StarOE system as shown in 286. The return response is either invalid user/password or valid user. When the customer has been authenticated, the customer is then presented with a list of authorized applications. This list determines which buttons, for example, representing each

-50SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 application are active, thus controlling customer access to products and services.

In addition, also shown in 286, the customer may be issued a temporary password with the customer's fulfillment package, which enables a user to log into the system the first time.

Information may also be entered and requested by a number of sites other than a user platform. For example, order entry OE Hubs 288 may enter information directly into the StarOE database 160 to register new customers to the integrated suite of network applications. They may also access the data in StarOE directly to modify customer information, and to add or remove subscribed services.

Other inputs to the StarOE server may include entitlement data from a legacy order entry system referred to as Network Capabilities System (NetCap) 290 and from a circuit order management system (COMS) 291. For example, the NetCap mainframe 290 may send the appropriate hierarchy of toll-free numbers for a specific customer in response to registry message registering the new customer to the mainframe 290. The hierarchy of toll-free numbers describes the new customer's entitlements to the TFNM services. This hierarchy may be used by other services in the integrated suite of network applications, for example, the StarWRS reporting application.

Additional authentication and entitlement data may be transmitted from a corporate order entry system (CORE) 292 which generates two sets of hierarchy files on a daily basis. One set comprises deltas only, the other comprises a full hierarchy. Notification is made to the StarOE when these are

-51SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 25)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 available. StarOE performs a reconciliation process to update the hierarchy files. Figure 9 is an output process flow diagram, illustrating outputs and responses from the StarOE server 39 to the requesting systems and processes. An example of an output is an authentication response to the client side of the individual applications, e.g., call manager 1100, priced reporting system 400, etc., as well as the backplane. In addition, a list of accessible applications for a given customer, is output to the backplane platform via platform web servers 24. The StarOE also outputs various updated data to database systems associated with specific individual applications in the suite of network applications. In addition, the individual fulfilling systems receive messages from the StarOE regarding modifications effected by a customer interaction. For example, as part of the reconciliation process, the StarOE may pass a list of toll free numbers which represent services which are to be discontinued and deleted from Traffic View. Upon receipt of this information, the Traffic View server sends another message to a system responsible for collecting call detail information which system then discontinues collection of call data for the numbers deleted. Another example output to individual fulfilling system is hierarchy data to reporting fulfilling systems 400, 500 when a customer requests reports. The customer hierarchy data is sent in real time by the StarOE for up-to-date report information.

StarWRS

-52SUBSTTTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

As mentioned herein, the data architecture component of the networkMCI Interact system focuses on the presentation of real time (un-priced) call detail data and reports, such as presently provided by MCI's Trafficview (TVS) Server, and priced call detail data and reports, such as presently provided by MCI's operational data store StarODS Server.

Referred to as StarWRS, the WWW/Internet Reporting System 200, as shown in Figure 10, provides a client, middle-tier service and application proxy components enabling customers to request, specify, customize, schedule and receive their data and account information in the form of reports that are generated by the various back-end application servers. As will now be described in detail, the StarWRS reporting system 200 comprises the following components and messaging interfaces:

1) those components associated with the Client GUI application front end including a report requestor client application 212, a report viewer client application 215 and, an Inbox client application 210 which implement the logical processes associated with a Java Client, i.e., employs Java applets launched from the backplane (Figure 3) that enable the display and creation of reports and graphs based on the fields of the displayed reports, and, allows selection of different reporting criteria and options for a given report; and,

2) those middle-tier server components enabling the above-mentioned reporting functionality including: a Report Manager server 250, a Report scheduler server 260, and an Inbox Server 270. Supporting the StarWRS reporting functionality as will

-53SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 be described are the StarOE client and corresponding StarOE server 39 applications.

The Report Manager (RM”) server 250 is an application responsible for the synchronization of report inventory with the back-end Fulfilling StarODS server 4ÛÛ and Traffic View server 500; retrieval of entitlements, i.e., a user's security profiles, and report pick list information, i.e., data for user report customization options, from the StarOE server 39; the transmission of report responses or messages to the Dispatcher server 26; the maintenance of the reporting databases; and, the management of metadata used for displaying reports. In the preferred embodiment, the RM server 2 50 employs a Unix daemon that passively listens for connect requests from the GUI client applications and other back-end servers and deploys the TCP/IP protocol to receive and route requests and their responses. Particularly, Unix stream sockets using the TCP/IP protocol suite are deployed to listen for client connections on a well-known port number on the designated host machine. Client application processes, e.g., report requestor 212, desiring to submit report requests connect to RM 250 via the dispatcher 26 by providing the port number and host name associated with RM 250 in a request message. Request messages received by the RM server are translated into a metadata” format and validated by a parser object built into a report manager proxy 250’ that services requests that arrive from the GUI front-end. If the errors are found in the metadata input, the RM 250 will return an error message to the requesting client. If the metadata passes the validation tests, the request type will be determined

-54SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 and data will be retrieved by the fulfilling server in accordance with the meta data request after which a standard response is sent back to the requesting client. As shown in Figure 10, interface sockets 252 are shown connecting the Dispatcher server 26 and the RM server 250 and, other socket connections 254, 256 are shown interfacing with respective back end servers 400 and 500. In one embodiment, a back-end midrange application known as the Trafficview System receives the metadata requests to provide unpriced traffic call detail and reporting data through messaging interface 256 to the Report Manager. Additionally, a back-end midrange application known as the StarODS server receives report requests for priced call detail data through a Talarian smart socket messaging interface 350 to the Report Manager. Additionally, as shown in Figure 10, the priced and unpriced data is FTP'd directly to the Inbox Server and a notification message is sent to the report manager server 250 from the Traffic View server 500. Although not shown in Figure 10, it should be understood that the RM 250 server can manage reporting data for customer presentation from other back-end and legacy servers including, e.g., Event Monitor and Service Inquiry servers, etc., in order to present to a customer these types of network management and reporting data.

The report manager server additionally utilizes a database 258, such as provided by Informix, to provide accounting of metadata and user report inventory. Preferably, an SQL interface is utilized to access stored procedures used in processing requests and tracking customer reports. A variety of C++ tools and other tools such as Rogue Wave's tools.h++ are

-55SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 additionally implemented to perform metadata message parsing validation and translation functions.

The Report Manager server 250 additionally includes the scheduling information, however, a report scheduler server component passes the report request to the back-end fulfilling servers 400, 500 at the scheduled times.

As shown in Figure 10, the Report Scheduler (RS”) server component 260 interfaces directly with the Report Manager server 250 to coordinate report request scheduling and processing. It should be understood that the respective report management and scheduling functions could be performed in a single server. Particularly, the RS 260 is a Unix program deploying Unix stream sockets using the TCP/IP protocol suite to send requests to the back-end fulfilling servers such as the StarODS server 400, TVS server 500, at pre-specified times, and receives their responses. As shown in Figure 10, RS interface socket connections 264, 266 are shown interfacing with respective back end servers 400 and 500. In the case of priced billing data from StarODS 400, report requests are published by the RS server 260 to a pre-defined subject on the Talarian Server. When handling other incoming messages published by back end servers using Talarian SmartSockets 4.0, another daemon process is necessary that uses Talarian C++ objects to connect their message queue and extract all messages for a given subject for storage in a database table included in database 263. Each message includes the track number of the report that was requested from the fulfilling server.

From the report requestor interface, the user may specify the type of reporting, including an

-56SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 indication of the scheduling for the report, e.g., hourly, daily, weekly or monthly. For priced data the user has the option of daily, weekly, or monthly. For real-time, or unpriced data, the user has the option of hourly, daily, weekly or monthly. The report scheduler interface additionally enables a user to specify a pager or E-mail account so that an e-mail or pager message may be sent to indicate when a requested report is in the Inbox server 270.

The Inbox Server component 270 serves as the repository where completed report data and event notification data are stored, maintained, and eventually deleted and is the source of data that is downloaded to the client user via the dispatcher (Figure 2) over a secure socket connection 272. It is also a Unix program that is designed to handle and process user requests submitted in metadata format using an Informix database. Once report results are received from the StarODS 400 and TVS 500 and any other back-end or fulfilling servers (not shown), the Report Manager server 250 communicates the corresponding report metadata to the Inbox server 270 over socket connection 274 as shown in Figure 10. The metadata will be stored in the Inbox server database 273 along with the report results. Thus, if the metadata is required to be changed, it will not interfere with the information needed to display the reports included in the Inbox. Additionally, as shown in Figure 10, the Inbox server interfaces with the report scheduler to coordinate execution and presentation of reports.

As described above, the StarOE server 39 and database 160 is the repository of user pick lists and user reporting entitlements. Particularly, it is shown

-57SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT7US98/20173 interfacing with the Inbox server 270 and report scheduler servers 260. The Report Manager server does include information in the report metadata that will tell the Report Requestor client application it needs to get information (e.g., Pick Lists) from the StarOE server 39.

With regard to the front-end client GUI components, the above-mentioned Inbox client application 210 functions as an interface between the client software and the Inbox server 270 for presenting to the customer the various types of reports and messages received at the Inbox including all completed reports, call detail, and news. Preferably, the messages for the user in the inbox are sorted by type (report, call detail) and then by report type, report name, date, and time.

Particularly, the Inbox client application uses the services of the backplane (Figure 3) to launch other applications as needed to process report messages. The inbox will also use the services of the data export objects to provide a save/load feature for inbox messages, and, is used to provide a userinterface for software upgrade/download control. Inbox messages are generated by the versioning services of the backplane; actual downloads will be accomplished by a request through the inbox.

In the preferred embodiment, the inbox client is able to receive information on multiple threads to allow a high priority message to get through even if a large download is in progress. Typically, the browser is configured to allow more than one network connection simultaneously, i.e., the polling thread on the client uses a separate connection to check for new messages,

-58SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

<img file="CA2304543A1_D0004.tif" />

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 and starts a new thread on a new connection when a new message is detected. In this way, multiple messages may be downloaded simultaneously.

The Report Requestor application 212 is a client application enabling user interaction for managing reports and particularly includes processes supporting: the creation, deletion, and editing of the user's reports; the retrieval and display of reports based on selected criteria; the display of selected option data; and the determination of entitlements which is the logical process defining what functionality a user can perform within the StarWRS application. In the preferred embodiment, a Report request may be executed immediately, periodically, or as one-shots to be performed at a later time. As described herein, the report scheduler service maintains a list of requested reports for a given user, and forwards actual report requests to the appropriate middle-tier servers at the appropriate time. Additional functionality is provided to enable customers to manage their inventory, e.g., reschedule, change, or cancel (delete) report requests.

The Report Viewer application 215 is a GUI Applet enabling a user to analyze and display the data and reports supplied from the fulfilling servers such as ODS 400, Traffic view (TVS) 500, and other systems such as Broadband and toll free network manager. Particularly, all reporting is provided through the Report Viewer client application 215 which supports text displays, a spreadsheet, a variety of graphic and chart types, or both spreadsheet/graph simultaneously, and, is launched from the inbox client 210 when a report is selected. The Report Manager 250 includes

-59SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 and provides access to the metadata which is used to tell the Report Requestor what a standard report should look like and the pick-list options the user has in order for them to customize the standard report. It is used to tell the Report Viewer client how to display the report, what calculations or translations need to be performed at the time of display, and what further customization options the user has while viewing the report. It additionally includes a common report view by executing a GUI applet that is used for the display and graphing of report data and particularly, is provided with spreadsheet management functionality that defines what operations can be performed on the spreadsheet including the moving of columns, column suppression, column and row single and multiple selection, import and export of spreadsheet data, printing of spreadsheet, etc. It is also provided with report data management functionality by defining what operations can be performed on the data displayed in a spreadsheet including such dynamic operations as sorting of report data, sub-totaling of report data, etc.. Furthermore, the report viewer 215 is provided with functionality enabling the interpretation of Meta Data; and, functionality enabling communication with the Backplane (Figure 3). The report viewer application 215 will also be able to accept messages telling it to display an image or text that may be passed by one of the applications in lieu of report data (e.g., Invoice, Broadband report, etc.)

By associating each set of report data which is downloaded via the Inbox server 270 with a metadata report description object, reports can be presented without report-specific presentation code.

-60SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 25)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

At one level, these metadata descriptions function like the catalog in a relational database, describing each row of a result set returned from the middle tier as an ordered collection of columns. Each column has a data type, a name, and a desired display format, etc.

Column descriptive information will be stored in an object, and the entire result set will be described by a list of these objects, one for each column, to allow for a standard viewer to present the result set, with labeled columns. Nesting these descriptions within one another allows for breaks and subtotaling at an arbitrary number of levels.

The same metadata descriptions may be used to provide common data export and report printing services. When extended to describe aggregation levels of data within reporting dimensions, it can even be used for generic rollup/drilldown spreadsheets with just-in-time data access.

The metadata data type may include geographic or telecommunications-specific information, e.g., states or NPAs. The report viewer may detect these data types and provide a geographic view as one of the graph/chart types.

An overview of the report request/scheduling process 600 implemented by StarWRS Report Manager and Report Requestor tools will now be described.

After preliminary logon, authentication and verification of StarWRS web based reporting entitlements, as described above with respect to Figures 4-6, the user may select the Report Requestor icon 83 (a) from the home page screen display 79(a) of

-61SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

Figure 5(a), which initiates display of a StarWRS report requestor web page.

Figure 12(a) illustrates an exemplar dialog box 1550 provided on the report requestor web page that is presented to the user after the logon and authentication process. From this dialog, the user is enabled to edit an existing report maintained in the report manager inventory, by selecting edit button 1551, generate a new report by selecting new button 1553, copy an existing report by selecting button 1554, or delete an existing report by selecting button 1555. When creating a new report or editing an existing report, the user may enter the desired reporting options including: 1) the report product, as indicated by menu 1558, and which includes toll-free, vision, and Vnet options; 2) the report category, as indicated by menu 1559, and which includes options for: analyzing traffic, call center, call detail, checking calling frequencies, financial, marketing, monitoring usage, and telecommunications categories; 3) the report type, as indicated by menu 1560, and which includes priced call detail data or traffic data options; and 4) a report direction, as indicated by selection areas 1563, and which includes inbound, outbound, or both directions.

Referring to the flow chart of Figure 11(a) depicting the StarWRS reporting options, user selection of the report product, report category, report type, and report direction, is indicated at step 320. Additionally, at step 325, the user may select the report format associated with a reporting category.

-62SUBSTÎTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

For example, in the screen display of Figure 12(a), associated with the analyze traffic report category, the report format options indicated in selection field 1565 include the following: area code summary, country code summary, state summary, frequent numbers, payphone report and review calls options. For the financial report category, report formats include: longest calls, most expensive calls, payphone report, and area code summary; for marketing report category, report formats include: country code summary, state summary, frequent numbers, frequent area code summary, frequent state, and frequent cities. For the telecommunications report category, report formats include: call duration summary; for the call center report category, report formats include: most active toll free numbers, state summary, and country code summary. For the monitor usage report category, report formats include: longest calls, most expensive calls, most active calling card and most active toll free numbers. For the check calling frequencies report category, report formats include: frequent numbers, frequent area code, frequent state and frequent cities. It should be understood that enablement of any of these reporting options is based according to predefined user entitlements. That is, as described above, a Get User Security message with a reporting application set, and a Get User Report Security message are sent to the StarOE server 39 via the Dispatcher server 26 to retrieve that user's detailed security profile (entitlements) for a user that has the reporting application option. These entitlements include a list of all the report products,

-63SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

i.e., Vnet, Vision, Toll free, report types (priced or unpriced) and the report categories that are available for that user.

In accordance with the user report selections, if a report had already been created and maintained in the report manager database, it will be displayed in the report inventory field 1568 of Figure 12(a). Referring back to Figure 11(a), at step 326, a determination is made as to whether an existing report from inventory is selected. If an existing report is not selected then the user is prompted to generate a new report according to customization options that the user is entitled for the selected report product, category, type, etc., as indicated at step 330. If an existing report is selected at step 326 based on the report product, category, type, etc., then the user is prompted at step 328 to select from among the following options: a report edit option, as shown at step 335; a report delete option, in which case the selected report will be deleted at steps 338 and 339; and, a report copy option, in which case an existing report will be copied, e.g., for subsequent editing, as shown at steps 340 and 341.

Whether creating a new report or editing an existing report, the user is enabled tô select customization options as indicated at step 330, Figure 11(a). Figure 12(b) illustrates the dialog screen 1596 presented to the user showing all the report customization categories for building a new report and editing an existing report. From this screen and related report building dialog boxes, all of the

-64SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 initial values for retrieving the MetaData, customization options and GUI builder options from the report manager server 250 necessary to build (edit) a report are provided in accordance with the user's entitlements. Thus, in view of the exemplar web page shown in Figure 12(b), a user may provide the following customization and report builder options as indicated in the field 1570: general customization options, by selecting field 1571; layout customization options, by selecting field 1573; access customization options, by selecting field 1575; hierarchy customization options, by selecting field 1577; geographic customization options, by selecting field 1578; and, notification customization options, by selecting field 1579. For the following description regarding Figure 12(b) it is assumed that the area code summary format had been selected, however, it should be understood that the same principles apply to any selected format.

With regard to.the general customization options, the user is enabled to specify or change the report title, by selecting field 1571a, report description, by selecting field 1571b, and the report schedule, by selecting field 1571c. For the example selection of report title customization shown in Figure 12(b), the right hand field 1580 will present the user with a field 1581 for entering the title of the report. If an existing inventory report had been selected, then the field 1580 will display the existing title. Generally, for each of the customization screens displayed for existing reports, Report Manager will

-65SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 autopopulate the right hand field 1580 with the existing report values.

When selecting the report schedule 1571c, the user is presented with a screen 1597, as shown in Figure 12(c). The entry options for selection in the right hand field 1580 includes: selection of time zone, by menu choice 1582; selection of the report schedule radio buttons 1583 to specify the report as recurring, daily, weekly, monthly, or hourly entry field the nature of screen; a time range for the report as specified by entry fields 1584; and, a date range for the report as specified by entry fields 1585. The user may also specify the report as a one-shot by selecting radio button 1586.

Referring back to the exemplar screen shown in Figure 12 (b), with regard to the layout customization options, the user is enabled to specify or change the number of report rows, by selecting field 1573a, and specify or change the report columns, by selecting field 1573b. For example, selection of report columns customization will present the user with a columns customization screen such as example screen display 1598 presented as shown in Figure 12(d). In Figure 12(d), the right hand field 1580 indicates a column tab 1587, and a sorts tab, 1588. The column tab enables the user to specify add or remove columns, with the selection of individual columns names provided in field 1589. An example description of the column headers for an example selection of columns is shown in field 1590.

-66SUBSTÎTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

Referring back to Figure 12(d) _r selection of report sorts customization tab 1588 will present the user with a sorts customization screen such as example screen display 1599 presented as shown in Figure 12(e). The sorts tab enables the user to specify columns to be sorted in an available sorts selection field 1591, whether totals are to be made, whether the column data to be provided is in ascending or descending order, for example, as provided by selection of buttons 1592, shown in Figure 12(e). In the preferred embodiment, the Report Manager provides the customer with the ability to specify select columns as primary and secondary sorts. The user may specify additional secondary sorts in addition to the default sorts. For example, the user may provide the following sorts: for a Longest Call Report, a primary sort is Number of Minutes in descending order. For a Most Expensive Call Report, the primary sort is dollars in descending order.

Referring back to exemplar screen shown in Figure 12(b), with regard to the access customization options, the user is enabled to specify or change an accounting IDACC code or supplemental code, by selecting field 1575a, and specify or change the inbound access type, by selecting field 1575b. For example, selection of inbound access customization presents the user with a web page having an inbound access customization screen such as example screen display 1601 presented as shown in Figure 12(f). In Figure 12(f), depending upon the selected report format, the right hand entry field 1604 presents the

-67SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 user with the following selectable access types: dial 1, card, dedicated, 800 Remote Access, Direct Dial fax, store/forward fax, 800 Business line (highlighted in the Figure 12(f)), 800 wide area telecommunications service, 800 dedicated, 800 Network Call Redirect, local, cellular.

Referring back to exemplar screen shown in Figure 12(b), with regard to the hierarchy customization options, the user is enabled to specify or change the billing location by selecting field 1577a. Upon selection of the billing location customization option, the user is presented with a web page having a customization screen such as example screen display 1603 presented as shown in Figure 12(g). In Figure 12(g), depending upon the selected report format, the right hand screen presents the user with three tabs: a corporations tab 1607, a search tab, 1608, and, a selected items tab 1609. When selected, the corporations tab 1607 enables the user to add or remove a corporate ID to/from a billing location hierarchy in the entry field 1610. A search of corporate IDs may be performed by selecting the search tab 1608, and items that have been selected may be displayed in a field (not shown) presented by selection of the selected items tab. Likewise, referring back to exemplar web page screen shown in Figure 12 (b), with regard to the geographic customization options, the user is enabled to specify or change the billing location by selecting field 1577a. Upon selection of the billing location customization option, the user is presented with a web page having a customization screen

-68SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

<img file="CA2304543A1_D0005.tif" />

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 such as example screen display 1611 presented as shown in Figure 12(h).

In Figure 12(h), depending upon the selected report format, the right hand screen presents the user with three tabs: a countries tab 1612, a search tab,

1613, and, a selected items tab 1614. When selected, the countries tab 1612 enables the user to select, add or remove a country that may be a subject for reporting as provided in the entry field 1620. A search of countries may be performed by selecting the search tab

1613, and items that have been selected may be displayed in a field (not shown) presented by selection of the selected items tab 1614.

Referring back to exemplar screen shown in

Figure 12(b), with regard to the notification customization options, the user is enabled to specify report notification by paging, by selecting field 1579a, and, report notification by e-mail, by selecting field 1579b. Upon selection of the paging notification option, the user is presented with a web page having a customization screen (not shown) presenting the user to select or enter that user's page number, PIN number and a paging message description. Upon selection of the e· mail notification option, the user is presented with a web page having a customization screen (not shown) presenting the user to select or enter that user's email address.

As mentioned above with respect to Figure 10, the Report Requestor client application 212 gains

3θ access to the metadata stored at the Report Manager server 250 through messaging. Particularly, as

-69SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 hereinafter described, a message generated by the Report Requestor in accordance with the user request is first received by the report manager proxy 250'. In the preferred embodiment, the report manager proxy comprises a set of tools in the form of reusable objects, preferably written in C++ code, or the like. For example, a parser object tool is employed to decompose the Metadata messages sent by the report requestor 212 to validate the message. If errors are found in the Metadata input, the RM will return an error message to the requesting client. If the Metadata passes the validation tests, the request type is then determined and the appropriate service will be invoked after which a standard response is sent back to the requesting client.

The Report Manager 250 implements stored procedures to translate the message, perform the request, and send the information back to the Report Requestor 212 which uses the metadata to determine what a standard report should look like, the customization options the user has, and the types of screens that should be used for the various options (i.e., single selection, multiple selections, etc.).

It is understood that the selection of available standard template reports is based on the user's entitlements .

The following types of metadata requests and responses that may be generated by the StarWRS Report Requestor 212 and Report Manager 250 components include: 1) Get/Send report template list (GRTL/SRTL)which request enables retrieval of the list of all

-70SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 standard report templates for all products and is used only to obtain general report information, e.g., report title, description, etc.; 2) Get/Send report template detail (GRTD/SRTD) - which request retrieves the details of a specific standard report template; 3) Get/Send user report list (GURL/SURL) - which request retrieves the list of all user reports for the report format selected from a user report table and is used only as a request for general report information, e.g., report title, status, etc.; 4) Get/Send user report detail (GURD/SURD)- which request retrieves the details of a specific user’s report; 5) Add report definition/Acknowledgment (ARD/ARDA)- which requests addition of a user-created report to a user report table. If the report is a scheduled report, this request is also communicated to the fulfilling server at the time the report is due; 6) Delete report definition/Acknowledgment (DRD/DRDA)- which request deletes a user-created report from the user table; 7) Copy report definition/Acknowledgment (CRD/CRDA) which request creates a duplication of the report the user is editing (other than the report title) and creates a new report ID for it; 8) Update Reporting Schedule/Acknowledgment (URD/URDA) - which request updates the scheduling information on a report without having to send a Delete and Add request; and, 9) Get Pick List/Acknowledgment (GPL)- which request enables the Report Requestor 212 to get a pick list provided by StarOE server.

The aforementioned Appendices A-H provides a series of tables comprising the content for each

-71SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PC17US98/20173 metadata message request that can be sent by the report requestor 212 for each of the enumerated user requests, in addition to the format of the corresponding metadata message responses by the RM server 250.

Having described the functionality of selecting and/or generating a report and customizing it, reference is now had to Figure 11(b) which describes the next step 350 of presenting the user with report run and save options. Particularly, in the preferred embodiment, as shown in each of the customization screens (Figures 12(b)-12(h)), the user may select a save and exit option, depicted in Figure 12(b) as button 1562 or a save and run option, depicted in Figure 12(b) as button 1563. In either scenario, an WRSEdit object enables a WRSScnMgr object to save the report to the RM server. The WRSScnMgr object launches each screens save method which communicates with the DataManager object to place the screens data in its corresponding WRSNode. Once all of the WRSNode objects have been updated, the WRSScnMgr object calls the DataManager object's SaveReport method to build a hash table to include all of the report's data. The CommunicationManager utilizes the RptManagerMsg object to create the ARD metadata message from the hash table, the WRSCommWrapper for direct communication with the backend, and the WRSReportManagerUtilParser to handle any errors thrown by the server. The Report Manager creates the Dispatcher object, and utilizes the services of the RMParser class and validation objects. Upon determining that the client has sent a valid message, the appropriate member function is invoked to

-72SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 service the request. The response is built inside the esql wrapper function after obtaining the necessary information through the stored procedure from the RM database. The Report Manager creates the RMServerSocket object and sends the ARDA message back to the client. When a report is submitted the selected report type and reporting criteria are sent to the Report Manager.

As illustrated in Figure 11(b), at step 355, in reference to user selection of a Save and Run report option, the report is marked as scheduled and saved in the Report Scheduler server 260 via the report Manager. Subsequently, as indicated at step 360, the Report Scheduler server 260 sends the ARD message to the fulfilling server which queues the report and runs the report at the specified time(s), as indicated at step 365.

Generally, whether the report is to be currently run for immediate ad hoc reporting, or, is scheduled for normal scheduled reporting, the following sequence of operations, as indicated at steps 370-395, Figures 11(b) - 11(c), are performed: First, in response to receipt of the ARD message, e.g., submitted to the fulfilling server by the Report Scheduler, the fulfilling server completes the report and compresses the report/data, as indicated at step 370. Then, the report/data is pushed, implementing FTP, to the fulfilling server's directory on the Inbox server 270, as indicated at step 373. Each application server, e.g., TVS server 550 (Figure 10), is responsible for generating unique file names within their directory on

-73SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 the Inbox server 270. For example, the following directory and file naming conventions used for reports generated by the Trafficview server are labeled inbox\files\TVs with text files having the suffix *. txt or *.txt_zip (compressed), and comma separated files having a suffix *.csv or *.csv_zip (compressed). The fulfilling server then verifies that the FTP process was successful, as indicated at step 376, and, at step 379, a notification is sent by the fulfilling server to the Report Manager to notify the Report Manager server 250 of the location of a scheduled report. This is accomplished by using a NRL metadata message.

In the preferred embodiment, the NRL message received by the RM server 250 includes parameters verifying whether or not the FTP process was successful. If it was successful, then the fulfilling server messages the Inbox that the file has been transmitted successfully by transmitting the report name (filename) and location. When the fulfilling server encounters a problem executing a report, a notification is sent to the Report Manager. Particularly, an error flag is placed in the status field of the User_report by the Report Manager which is displayed to the user during Report Request. The error message description will be placed in a text file and FTP'd to the fulfilling server's report location on the Inbox server (e.g., \inbox\files\TVs) by the fulfilling server.

Referring to Figure 11(b), step 379, once the RM server 250 has received the NRL message from the fulfilling server, it verifies the file's presence, as

-74SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

<img file="CA2304543A1_D0006.tif" />

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 indicated at step 382. The RM server 250 then builds a metadata file, e.g., by compressing the appropriate metadata (for displaying the report) into a .MTD file, as indicated at step 385. This .MTD file is utilized by the Report Viewer to know how to display the report. The Report Manager server creates a file including the metadata using the same file name as the report/data file, but having the following suffix: *.mtd or *.mtd__zip indicating a metadata or compressed metadata file, respectively.

Once the metadata file corresponding to the requested report is built by the Report Manager, the RM ftp's the .MTD file to the Inbox server, as indicated at step 388, Figure 11(c). The RM server additionally updates the User__report table status field with a status C indicating completion, as indicated at step 391.

Once the Report Manager has updated the status field, the RM server 250 then adds the report to the Inbox server, as indicated at step 393. Particularly, the RM server supplies a metadata A message to the Inbox indicating the FTP file location. Via the report viewer, the report is now available for viewing, downloading, saving, or printing by the user.

Particularly, as shown in the exemplary nMCI home page in Figure 5(a), the nMCI Interact Message Center icon 81 may be selected which will cause the display of a web page including the message center dialog box 1510 such as shown in Figure 13(a). From the dialog box 1510, a user may select from among three tabs, a news tab 1512, a reports tab 1513 and a data

-75SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 tab 1514. Selection of the reports tab 1513 enables the retrieval of both a data file and a metadata file from the Inbox Server corresponding to those reports that have been run and available for customer viewing. Information provided for display by the message center display 1510 is provided by the User_table which keeps track of the status of all reports for a particular user. Particularly, by double-clicking a chosen report, a report viewer application is enabled to display the chosen report on a web-page. Figure 13(b) illustrates an example web-page presenting a text viewer screen 1515 enabled by selecting the highlighted report 1514 in Figure 13(a).

Referring back to Figure 10, the Report Viewer 215 interfaces with the user's Inbox 210 for presenting to the customer the various type of reports received at the Inbox. Preferably, all Report Requestor and Report Viewer applications communicate with the RM server 250 through the use of the common object communication classes.

It should be understood that fulfilling servers such as the Broadband, and Toll Free Network Manager 500, StarODS 400, Report Scheduler server, and any other back-end or fulfilling servers (not shown), send report results and event notifications to the inbox server 270. The fulfilling servers, and Report Manager server may communicate to the inbox server 270 by making requests to the inbox proxy 270·. The proxy, generally waits for a request from an application and then services the request.

-76SUBSTTTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

The inbox proxy's main responsibility is to process requests by either handling them internally within the inbox proxy 270' or forwarding them to the inbox server 270, and then responding back to the client (i.e., the fulfilling servers in this case). In order to maintain secure connectivity throughout the system, the inbox proxy 270’ uses the application program interfaces (APIs) provided by the networkMCI Interact supporting different types of data transport mechanisms: synchronous transaction; asynchronous transaction; and, synchronous bulk transfer. The transport mechanisms are implemented as sockets message protocol, and the proxy handles its conversation processing on a thread or process per conversation basis for servicing multiple simultaneous clients.

As an alternative to the transports above, the inbox server 27Û offers direct File Transport Protocol (FTP) put for very large transfers in order to alleviate some of the network server loads. The fulfilling servers 400, 500 with large data transfers typically use the common shareware compression format ZIP which is also PKZIP compatible. Alternately, the fulfilling servers 400, 500 distributing information via the inbox may put the data to the inbox and defer zipping until after the inbox receives the data.

As described, the fulfilling servers, when placing the data in the inbox, notify the report manager server 250 they are adding new data in the inbox. The report manager 250 then retrieves and FTPs the appropriate metadata associated with the new data in the inbox, notifying the inbox of the new additions

-77SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 to the inbox, i.e., the new data and the associated metadata. The metadata is then stored in the inbox server database 273 along with the report results. Thus, if the metadata is required to be changed, it does not interfere with the information needed to display the reports included in the inbox.

Particularly, as shown in Figure 16, the

Inbox server 270 interface with the Inbox Client 210 supports messaging that enables the User to remove an item from the Inbox, e.g., delete a report, or, to delete all items from the Inbox, e.g., for a particular Enterprise and User ID as well as other associated reports. Particularly, the List L message is a synchronous request for a list of all Inbox items for a specific user. The Inbox fetch F function is a bulk transfer request that enables bulk transfer of the requested file to the Inbox client.

Referring back to Figure 12(b), after editing or modifying an existing report, the user may simply select to save the report and exit. In this case, the ARD message is sent from the Report Requestor client to the RM server and is saved in the RM inventory database for subsequent execution. Consequently, the report is flagged as incomplete in the User__table and may not be run until a run option for that report is chosen. Otherwise, the report may be immediately scheduled if the user selects the save and run button.

As described, Metadata messaging is used throughout the various components of the StarWRS system 200. The format of an interface message that is sent to the Report Scheduler server is identical to the

-78SUBSTÎTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 format as the interface messaging format returned by the RS server 260. Thus, in the case of automatic recurring reports, a variation of the process outlined in Figure 11(b) occurs at step 360, whereby the ARD request is instead sent from the report scheduler to the fulfilling server at the programmed frequency. Particularly, when a report is required to be run, the Report scheduler server 260 (Figure 10) sends an ARD request to the fulfilling server in a metadata message format having parameters as included in the Add Report Definition table provided in above-referenced Appendix D. Upon processing of the metadata message, the fulfilling server will respond to the report Scheduler with an acknowledgment of the command, and the process outlined in Figures 11(b) and 11(c) is executed.

The Report Scheduler server 260 is additionally capable of updating the User_ report status table and, preferably, is provided with a tracking mechanism for tracking the scheduling of user reports. If the report is an Ad hoc report, it is marked as inactive in the user report table once the status is complete.

StarODS

As mentioned, the StarODS data management tool of the integrated suite of telecommunications network applications comprises a back-end architecture providing customers with priced reporting data pertaining to usage of their telecommunications networks .

-79SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

In Figure 14(a), there is shown the highlevel logical approach of the StarODS data management system 400 integrated with the StarWRS component 200 of the nMCI Interact architecture. Generally, the data management system 400 of the invention, referred to herein as StarODS, provides customers with priced reporting data pertaining to telecommunications services. Although the description herein pertains to priced billing data, it should be understood that the principles described herein could apply to any type of reporting data. Through StarWRS web-based reporting, the StarODS system provides priced reporting data and implements a DataMart approach for maintaining the data used for customer reporting. StarODS stores and incrementally processes customer's priced data included in call detail records, and loads this processed data in Data Marts. From these data marts customer's priced reporting data may be provided to customers on a daily basis via the StarWRS reporting system.

For priced reporting data, report categories from which a variety of reports can be generated include: a) Financial category - for providing priced data reports relating to longest calls, most expensive calls. Off Peak Calls, payphone report, usage summary, calling card summary, and area code summary for Toll Free, VNET, Vision, and CVNS customers; b) Marketing category · for providing priced data reports relating to country code summary, state summary, frequent numbers, frequent area code summary, frequent state, and frequent cities; c) Telecommunications category -80SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 for providing priced data reports relating to call duration summary, IDACC/Supp Code Summary and Call Access Summary for Toll Free, VNET, Vision, CVNS customers; d) Call Center report category- for providing priced data reports relating to most active toll free numbers. Hourly Distribution, Day of Week Distributions, state summary, and country code summary for their Toll Free, VNET, Vision, CVNS customers; e) Monitor Usage - for providing priced data reports relating to longest calls, most expensive calls, most active calling card and most active toll free numbers for their Toll Free, VNET, Vision, CVNS customers; f) Analyze Traffic - area code summary, country code summary, state summary, range summary, city summary, frequent numbers, payphone report, usage summary, calling card summary, IDACC/Supp Code Summary, Day of Week Distributions, Hourly Distribution, Call Access Summary and review calls; and, a g) Check Calling Frequencies category - for reporting on frequent numbers, frequent area code, frequent country codes, frequent state and frequent cities.

Figure 14(a) illustrates the primary components implemented in the StarODS priced reporting data management component 400. As shown in Figure 14(a), a first traffic feed 405 provides raw call detail records from external network switches, translates and sorts the data into billable records for input into two systems: a Commercial Billing system (NCBS) mainframe server process 410 for pricing the

-81SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 records at tariff for customers subscribing to, e.g., MCI's VNET and Vision telecommunications products; and, a toll-free billing server process 420 for pricing the records at tariff for customers subscribing to tollfree telecommunications products. A common data gateway component 430 including a mainframe extract process 435 and a data harvesting process 440 receives these inputs on both a daily and monthly basis for processing. Particularly, the mainframe extract process 435 creates a selection table including all subscribing customers, compresses files for transmissions and extracts priced reporting records from the runstreams. The harvesting process 440 is responsible for performing data validations, filtering, data translations, data grouping, data routing, and data logging functions. According to a dimension table based on data within selected BDRs, the harvesting process applies business rules to the data, cleanses the data, transforms the data, creates load files for DataMarts and compresses files for storage in the DataMarts. The harvesting component 440 may additionally perform an aggregation function for supporting long term storage and rapid access of data for customer reporting, and performs trigger actions/events based on predefined criteria.

Additionally, as shown in the Figure 14(a), other external systems and applications may interface with the common data gateway component 430 including: Cyclone Billing system 422a and Concert Virtual Network

-82SUBSTÎTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

Services 422b which provide additional billing detail records; and, a calling area database 425 which provides geographical reference information, i.e., identify city, state and country information.

After the data has been processed in the Harvesting component 440 it is input to an Operational Data Store component (ODS) 450 that stores the billing detail records and dimension tables as a data model. This ODS layer 450 is comprised of all data harvested from all applications in the data harvesting layer 430, and feeds report - supporting DataMarts 470 in a manner which supports customized data access. The Datamarts may be engineered to pre-process data, create aggregates, and otherwise perform transformations on the data prior to DataMart loading 465 in order to implement a defined data model, e.g., star schema key structures, fact and dimension tables depicted as block 460. In the preferred embodiment, as shown in Figure 14(a), the ODS 450 includes multiple datamarts 470 each for storing and retrieving daily and monthly priced data on a periodic basis. It primarily is responsible for hosting highly current data, typically at least 72 hours old. In accordance with customer-reporting needs, data marts 470 are partitioned in accordance with partitioning schemes which, in the invention, is based on customer-ID. Particularly, each DataMart is engineered for servicing specific customers or specific product sets, as well as engineered for the specific requirements of the customer/product such as high

-83SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 insert activity, heavy reporting requirements, etc. As data is volatile and changing and may not produce consistent results for the same query launched at multiple times, ODS is engineered for high performance through appropriate storage technologies and parallel processing. Although not shown, a common data warehouse is provided in this ODS layer that is responsible for performing storage, retrieval and archiving of data, typically of relaxed currency (e.g,, more than 24 hours) and is targeted at trend analysis and detection. In the preferred embodiment, the datamarts utilize an Informix database in a star topology.

As described herein, from the data included in these data marts, one-time or recurring priced data reports are available for reporting through the NMCI Interact StarWRS reporting system 200.

Additionally, the ODS component 450 includes a Decision Support Server (DSS) reporting engine component 475 that performs the following functions: 1) receives various customer report requests from the StarWRS GUI Report Requestor component and accordingly generates database queries; 2) routes the query to the appropriate data marts 470, data warehouse or operational data store; and, 3) responds to the requestor with a formatted result set. The DSS server 475 may also perform cost estimation, agent scheduling, workflow broadcasting interface, and transaction logging functions. In the preferred embodiment, the

-84SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

DSS 475 is a cluster of DEC (Digital Equipment Corp.) UNIX 8400 servers running Information Advantage® software accessing an Informix database, e.g., Informix Dynamic Server V.7.3. database product, distributed across multiple Data Marts.

In accordance with the invention, the primary function of the DSS 475 is to generate priced billing report data in accordance with the customer's request which is received from the StarWRS reporting component as a metadata message. To accomplish this, the DSS interfaces with two StarWRS systems: Report Manager/Scheduler 250, and Inbox 270, as shown in Figure 14(a). As described herein, the Report Manager/Scheduler formats the customer's request in accordance with a defined set of rules and sends a metadata request message to the DSS. The DSS 475 reads the customer's metadata descriptions of the type of priced data report requested by a customer, translates the metadata into database queries, and implements commercial off-the-shelf (COTS) tools such as Information Advantage's Decision Suite™ to generate SQL queries, and run the queries against the data in the DataMarts. Afterwards, the query results are formatted by a formatter process into a form readable by StarWRS report viewing components, and the completed reports are transmitted to the directory of the customer's Inbox, e.g., via FTP.

In the preferred embodiment, a publish-andsubscribe communications tool 350 such as Talarian

-85SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

Smartsockets™ messaging middleware is used to coordinate report requests transmitted from the StarWRS report Manager to DSS, and report completion notification from DSS to the StarWRS Report Manager. The Report Manager formats the customer's request in accordance with a defined set of rules and sends the request to the DSS as a Talarian message with the Report Manager 250 maintaining the Talarian Sender program, and the Decision Support Server 475 maintaining the Talarian Receiver program. Messages are sent with guaranteed message delivery (GMD), thus assuring all request data sent by RM is received by the DSS. As known, Talarian messaging middleware defines a message as types and subjects. A message type is a structure that defines the format of the message. Message subjects are subsets of message types and describe messages by which Talarian receivers can subscribe. Conversely, message subjects describe messages by which Talarian senders publish.

In the application programming interface API, the RM server 250 publishes the message to the Decision Support Server in response to its receipt of a report request. Similarly, a DSS/Inbox API is provided to manage FTP transmission of completed customer report files including: error handling, retry logic, and the ability to maintain the file name and location of where report files are stored. Particularly, the DSS/Inbox API sends the report file to the inbox (Figure 14(a)).

-86SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

In the preferred embodiment, the DSS architecture is transparent to the Report Manager which publishes Talarian messages to which the DSS will subscribe. More particularly, an RTServer process located in the RM is provided for maintaining connections, implementing a report request queue 490 for ensuring guaranteed message delivery, and tracking the success of all messaging operations. In addition to the tokenized character string request message which specifies report type, filters, and any customer request - specific information, RM server provides additional fields as part of the Talarian request message including: a Corp_ID, Priority, and RequestID. Corp__ID allows the DSS to route the request to the appropriate data store without having to invoke a parser. Data are partitioned on Corp_ID in the ODS database warehouse. Requested is used to send back an ARDA failure message, in the event of an invalid message. The Priority field allows DSS to pickup the next high priority request from a queue of nonprocessed requests, without invoking the parser.

Figure 14(b) illustrates the implementation of an Information Advantage® Interface Object (IAIO) 472, which is a process running in the DSS 475 for performing the following functions: 1) publishes and subscribes Talarian messages to Report Scheduler; 2) parses the request metadata ARD (Add Report Definition) message received from the RS 260? 3) publishes an ARDA (Add Report Definition Acknowledgment); 4) populates a

-87SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 request table 493 with total, sub-total and sort information according to the received report request;

5) transforms the ARD tokens from the metadata request into an overlay file 492 which is a text file that is submitted to IA's Decision Suite™ process to generate the corresponding SQLs; 6) updates a Request Status table 4941 with appropriate status, e.g., process complete, failed, in progress, etc.; and, 7) if a failure occurs, it updates an error log (not shown).

More particularly, in view of Figure 14 (b), ARD metadata request messages are received into the ODS system via arbitrator processes which are responsible for routing the request message to the appropriate ODS database according to a Corp/ODS mapping table (not shown).

In Figure 14(b), a Talarian receiver, referred to herein as a Talarian Interface Object (TIO) 350, is a process that receives the Talarian message, manages the GMD functionality, and posts updates to the request table 493 and request status table 494. The contents of the ODS Request table 493 is the table maintained for the purpose of holding specific report request information from the received ARD message, and, a Request Status table 494, for tracking the status of DSS processes for the current request. As further shown in Figure 14(b), the receiver 350 inserts the message received from an arbitrator into the request table 493 and request status table 494 along with the priority, timestamp and

-88SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 status fields. The request status table resides on the ODS database and the messages are stored in the queue to provide queuing, log and tolerance from the failures. To determine the pending messages to be processed, a status field and history_stat flags are used.

As further shown in Figure 14(b), in operation, the Information Advantage® Interface Object (IAIO) 472 reads the status table 494 for new entries. When a new entry is posted, it invokes a parser process 495, for parsing the received report request ARD message, and generates an overlay text file 492 comprising tokens corresponding to the requested report format and data descriptions. An SQL engine generator, e.g., Decision Suite™, receives the overlay file 492 and performs the following functions: 1) generates SQL; 2)submits the SQL to the appropriate datamart (ODS database); 3) generates a Report file with a *. txt extension; 4) updates Request Status table 494 with appropriate status; and, 5} if a failure occurs, updates the error log. Following generation of the *txt file, a sort process is invoked to perform the following functions: 1) reads the Request table 390 for column(s) on which to sort the Report; 2) reads the *. txt file; 3) sorts the *.txt file and generates two files: i. a file with a *,hdr extension which file contains the header information, consisting only of only column id's, and, ii. a file with a *.data extension which file contains sorted data provided in

-89SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 the *. txt file and is the body of the report; 4) it further updates the request status table with a 'success' or 'failure' code; and, 5) if a failure occurs, updates the error log.

Continuously running FTP, NRL and ARDA processes are provided to take appropriate actions in accordance with the entries in the request status table 494. For example, an FTP process performs the following functions; 1) reads the status table 493 for entries ready to be sent to the Inbox and FTP's the .csv or .txt to the inbox 270; 2) Determines success or failure of file transfer; 3) Updates the Request Status table 494; and, if a failure occurs, updates an error log. The NRL (Notification of Report Location) process performs the following functions: 1) reads the Request Status table 494 for any success status or failure of any process; 2) Invokes a receiver process with appropriate status and file location populated in the NRL; and, 3) If failure occurs, updates the error log.

The end-to-end process 600 from a priced report request to report delivery is shown in Figures 15(a) - 15(c) .

Assuming successful user logon and authentication, as described herein, the first step 602 of Figure 15(a), indicates that a user has opened the report requester dialog box from the nMCI Interact home page (Figure 5(a)) by selecting the Report Requestor icon 83.

-90SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

Using metadata messaging, the StarWRS Report Requester retrieves an available report list (including user defined list) from StarWRS Report Manager, as indicated at step 605. This process entails invoking a Communication Manager object to communicate with the RM server in order to obtain a SURL metadata message, as described.

Next, as indicated at step 610, the Report inventory for the specific user is loaded and displayed for the user on the user report request display screen, enabling the user to select a report, as indicated at step 612. Then, at step 615, the selected report is retrieved from StarWRS Report Manager and displayed in the manner as described.

Then, as indicated at steps 618 and 620, the user selects a product, including phone numbers and geographic locations, etc. and enters criteria, i.e., reporting interval and frequency, if a new report is desired. Specifically, when the user selects a report from the Inventory List or a new report, an WRSEdit Screen is launched to provide the editing capabilities which are available for the Report format, as described.

Once a report is created the user may save the report request, e.g., by clicking a Save and Exit button, or submit the request, as indicated at step 625, e.g., by clicking a Save and Run button. When a report is submitted the selected report type and reporting criteria are sent to the Report Manager. As

-91SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 indicated at step 628, the RM creates the metadata request for which the DSS has a predefined interface. The metadata request is submitted by StarWRS Report Requester to a COTS software module, e.g., such as provided by Information Advantage® which module is used for the generation and execution of SQL statements and retrieval and formatting of the results. Particularly, the metadata requests are transmitted via an interface with the Talarian Smart Sockets product and a header is built for each report request including the Carped and Enterprise information which is used by the IAIO to select the proper DataMart as the target for the query. At this time, the report requestor additionally creates an entry in a RM table to track the progress of the request. The RM communicates with the StarODS using Talarian Smart Sockets® which creates a header comprising the product and other information, and controls the delivery of the report request. Smart Sockets guaranteed messaging feature automatically routes the call and repeatedly tries until the delivery is successful.

Next, as indicated at steps 630 and 632, the DSS receives the request and acknowledges receipt. Specifically, when the request is received it is first validated with StarOE to ensure that the user is entitled to receive information about the selected product corp and number(s). Once the request passes validation, the DSS IAIO reads the header to determine which Data Mart will ultimately be queried. It then

-92SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 parses the metadata into a format which the COTS software can readily convert into an SQL statement, as indicated at step 635, Figure 15(b), and adds the report to the DSS report queue based upon type (Daily,

Weekly, Monthly, Adhoc) and associated DataMart, as indicated at step 638. It should be understood that at this point, the request has been flagged as submitted in the RM database, as indicated at step 633.

From this point forward, DSS activity is controlled by a control process and progress or errors are logged internally in the DSS system. This control process includes logic enabling the prioritization of report requests and application of rules defining the order in which they should be executed. Thus, at the appropriate time, depending on the type or report, reporting period and other parameters, the Information Advantage query engine selects the report from the queue, as indicated at step 640, which action is logged in the report status table (Appendix I) as indicated at step 642. The SQL statement is then built by Decision

Suite™ and routed to the appropriate data mart for execution-in the manner as described herein, as indicated at step 643. The query engine generates the SQL statement from the metadata and executes the report 25 which action is logged in the report status table as indicated at step 645. Next, as indicated at step 648, the query results are returned, and, a post-SQL formatting process is invoked.

-93SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

More particularly, the report result set from Decision Suite™ is input to a Formatter module which performs various report result transformations including: 1) Converting of column headers generated by Information Advantage® into appropriate column ids that are recognizable to the StarWRS client viewer functionality (as indicated at step 650); 2) Provide subtotaling for specific requested subtotal by columns in the format required by the StarWRS client interface (as indicated at step 653) and provides report-based totals as requested by customer; 3) converting binary stream data file to ASCII text file (as indicated at step 655); 4) implementing Replace logic, e.g., replacement of TAB delimiters with appropriate Comma field delimiters (as indicated at step 657); 5) implementing Repeat/Padding logic, i.e., identifying compressed columns/values and decompressing (or repeating) the values that were compressed; 6) providing alphanumeric translations for any encoded data elements returned in the result set data file (as indicated at step 659); and, 7) adding new computed/derived columns, e.g., percents, averages of column data values, etc., as requested by customers on specific reports.

After formatting the report, as indicated at step 660, a message is sent to the control process to update the request status table 494 (Figure 14(b)). It should be understood that, if a failure occurs during formatting, the error log is updated and a status message sent to the request status table 494, as well.

-94SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

<img file="CA2304543A1_D0007.tif" />

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20I73

Then, as indicated at step 665 (Figure 15(c)), the formatter creates a *.csv (Comma Separated Value) or .txt file, gives the file a unique name and saves the file. Preferably, a *.csv is the file generated if the report is successfully generated. As indicated at step 668, the *.csv report/data file is then pushed, implementing FTP, to the StarODS server's directory on the Inbox server 270.

Finally, as indicated at step 670, once the file has been successfully transferred to the Priced reporting directory on the Inbox server, and the request status table 494 appropriately updated at step 675, an NRL message is sent to the RM Server 250 notifying it of the report file name and location in the Inbox, requestor information, and if the transfer was successful. This is accomplished by using a NRL metadata message with a corresponding NRLA message sent back to the DSS. Report Manager is subsequently notified of the successful completion of the report and the report request is marked as completed in the RM database. If the report is a recurring report, it is not marked as complete. After the control process updates the report status table, the Report Manager is notified that the report is complete and the Inbox server notifies the user that report is ready.

A user may subsequently retrieve the report by clicking on the message center icon 81 from the home page of Figure 5(a) which will present to the customer a list of all the available reports. To view a report the user selects the report and, the report metadata

-95SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 and the appropriate viewer are downloaded to the user (client) workstation.

TVS

As mentioned, the traffic view system (TVS) 500 of the present invention comprises a Traffic View Server 550 which functions to store network call detail records (CDRs) and statistics, generate reports and deliver reports and/or call detail to the customer via the StarWRS Web Reporting System, and, supplies on-line customer access to call detail and hourly statistics that aid the customer in Network management, call center management and customer calling pattern analysis. For real time (unpriced) data, statistics are generated for the following totals: minutes, attempts, completes, incompletes, other, dto (direct termination overflow), short calls, didn't wait, didn't answer, tcc, and equipment failures.

The process by which the TVS server 550 gets data is now explained in greater detail with reference to Figures 18 and 19. As shown, call records are created by a network switch 501. An AP (Adjunct processor) or Storage and Verification Elements (SAVE) platform 502 is co-located with each switch and receives all the call records from the switch as soon as possible after a call disconnects. The AP/SAVE sends all the call records to a(Network Information Concentrator (NIC) 503 where records are grouped together and those groupings numbered for a more efficient network utilization. If the NIC determines that it is missing a gap in the numbers, it will

-96SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 request the AP/SAVE resend that group of data to ensure that no data is lost. Should the NIC be unavailable to receive data, the AP/SAVE queues the data for later delivery. The NIC 503 receives all calls from all switches as soon as possible after a call has disconnected (hangs up) and distributes records to clients that match a certain criteria.

A generalized statistics engine (GSE) component 504 receives all records that are considered to be a toll free (800/8xx, etc) call from the NIC and also employs the same sequencing of groups of records to ensure that no data is lost. Should the GSE be unavailable, the NIC will queue the data for later delivery. The GSE component 504 further filters tollfree calls to only process calls that match a subscriber list which is maintained by an order entry OE process on the GSE (not shown) that accepts add. &amp; delete requests from TVS via a messaging interface 507 as shown in Figure 18. The GSE component then formats the CDRs, i.e., enhances the call records, from the form as originally provided at the switch, into a normalized form to allow for a common record format regardless of the type of switch that created the record, or the exact call record type. For example, different network switches generate different call detail records, e.g., call detail record, enhanced call detail records, etc., which denote differences in tollfree services and features. This type of call detail record generated by GSE component is herein referred to as a TCR (Translated Call Record).

-97SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 25)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

Groups of TCRs are sent from the GSE to TVS via TCP/IP. When TVS has safely stored that record it sends an acknowledgment to the GSE 504 so that the GSE may dispose of the group. Should TVS not be available to receive data, GSE queues data to be sent later.

As shown in Figure 18, in the preferred embodiment, initial customer provisioning occurs at either the Corporate Order Entry system 292 (CORE) or the StarOE server 39 component of MCI Interact. As shown in Figure 19, CORE 292 transmits daily to the TVS server 550 via Network Data Mover (NDM) files which comprise information about new reports for TVS to create, and where to send those reports, e.g., FAX, EMail, or US Mail. In the NMCI Interact Trafficview Server 550, a CORE FEED process 523 provisions reporting order and profiles into a reference database 551, and sets up scheduled reports to work on the next boundary, e.g., hourly, daily reports at midnight the next complete day, weekly reports at the end of the next week, monthly reports at the end of the month, etc.. If this report requires Call detail records, as opposed to aggregated data, a CDR database is selected based on weighted values for the existing database. If a request contains a toll-free number that has not been provisioned with the GSE, a GSE_OE process 524 is invoked to forward the order, e.g., toll-free number, from the reference database onto a DEC Message Queue™ DMQ 526a. A GSE__OE_SEND process 527 is invoked to keep a TCP/IP socket open to the GSE process so that the pending order may be forwarded to the GSE 5 04 via a TCP/IP interface. Once the order has been provisioned

-98SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20I73 in GSE the GSE may start to collect CDRs based on the requested toll-free number. In response, the GSE will invoke the GSE__OE_SEND process 527 to send an order response to a DMQ 526b, where it will be accessed by the GSE_OE process 524. The GSE_OE process 524, in turn, will confirm that the number has been provisioned within the TVS server and will update the reference database accordingly by removing the order from a pending order list. Invocation of the GSE_OE process and the GSE_OE_SEND process enables tracking of new customer orders, i.e., new toll-free network numbers for which CDR data is to be collected.

As further shown in Figures 18 and 20, in the preferred embodiment, requests to enable Trafficview customers are received in real-time from StarOE 39 via TCP/IP. Generally, StarOE specifies what general categories of reports can be requested for a given nMCI Interact subscriber. These categories include: (1) reports that only require data aggregation; (2) reports that require call detail records to be collected; and (3) real-time monitor (RTM) reports. This is provisioned into the reference database 551 for future verification of requests from the nMCI Interact platform. If a request contains a toll-free number that has not been provisioned with the GSE, a subscription request is sent to the GSE 504 to start collecting Trafficview data pertaining to that tollfree number. This request is sent by placing a request onto the DMQ queue 553, and the GSE_SEND__OE process 554 then forwards this request to the GSE 504 via a TCP/IP interface. in the preferred embodiment of an order

-99SUBSTÎTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 entry message generated by the TVS server for requesting unpriced traffic data from the GSE, the GSE selects all TCR's for TVS enabled customers and places them in a SAVE storage queue, e.g., Versant or Talarian, for subsequent distribution to the TVS server.

As further shown in Figure 18, an input feed from the calling area database component 508 (CADB) provides the TVS server 550 with reference data including state and country information for mapping NPA/NXX (Numbering Plan Area/ Number Exchange) to city name and state code, and, for mapping country codes to country names. Data is transported from the CADB database 518 to the TVS server via a network data mover (NDM) or FTP via interface 519.

A further input feed from the Global Information Repository GIR component 511 provides the TVS server with International toll-free number terminations on a periodic basis.

From the circuit order management system (COMS) component 515, TVS receives three NDM feeds: 1) a Trunk Type Master feed 516 used in Un-priced Reporting to map enhanced voice service/dedicated access line (EVS/DAL) infomation to specific service locations; 2) an automatic number identification (ANI) feed 517 also used in Unpriced Reporting to map EVS/DAL information to specific service locations; and, 3) a switch mapping feed 518 to map the switch ID (per Network control

-100SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCTAJS98/20173 system) to. the billing representations of the same switch.

As further shown in Fig. 18, unpriced data collection process begins with the placement of an order for unpriced reporting with the customer's account team. Specifically, the account team places the order in real time using an ordering system component. In a periodic process, this order information is transmitted to OEHubs 224, e.g., via email which later inputs the necessary service and reporting flags to the StarOE component 285, via messaging interface 226. The OEHubs 224 further adds new customers to the corporate order entry (CORE) system component 292, which provides customer billing hierarchy information used by the StarWRS system. The new customer hierarchy information is extracted by the CORE system 292, and is available for pickup by the StarOE server 39 via messaging interface 227.

The StarOE server 39 then messages the Traffic View Server 550 in real time via TCP/IP that the number has been added for Unpriced Reporting. The TVS additionally messages the GSE component 505 in real time to immediately initiate the collection of call detail for that number, as will be described in greater detail herein. Due to latency inherent in the fulfillment process, customers may select and receive daily reports after CDR collection begins.

In accordance with the invention, a wide variety of reports and reporting frequencies are available. In the preferred embodiment, reports are available in hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly frequencies. Types

-101SUBSTTTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 of TVS reports that are available to customers include: Standard reports; Summary reports; Termination Reports; Exception reports; and, unpriced call detail. For example, Standard reports that may be generated from stored Toll Free hourly statistics include, but are not limited to: Summary by Toll Free Number and Hour which is available in the following frequencies (Ad-hoc A,Daily D, Weekly W, and Monthly M); Summary by Toll Free Number and Date(A,D,W,M); Summary by Toll Free Number and day of week (DOW) (A,W,M) ; Summary by

Toll Free Number and Week (A,M); Summary by Toll Free Number and NPA (A,D,W,M); Summary by Toll Free Number, Service Location and Hour(A,D,W,M); Summary by Toll Free Number, Service Location and Date (A,D,W,M); Summary by Toll Free Number, Service Location and DOW (A,W,M); Summary by Toll Free Number, Service Location and Week (A,M); Summary by Service Location and Hour (A,D,W,M); Summary by Service Location and Date (A,D,W,M) ; Summary by Service Location and DOW (A,W,M) ? Summary by Service Location and Week (A,M); Summary by Service Location, Toll Free Number and Hour (A,D,W,M); Summary by Service Location, Toll Free Number and Date(A,D,W,M); Summary by Service Location, Toll Free Number and DOW (A,W,M); Summary by Service Location, Toll Free Number and Week (A,M) . The Toll Free Summary Reports generally comprise three sections: Summary, Incomplete Call Analysis, and Network Customer Blocked Analysis (other category breakdown). The Termination Summaries include three types of termination reports : Toll Free by Location, i.e., showing termination summary and incomplete call analysis by service

-102SU0STITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 location for a specific Toll Free number; By Location,

i.e., by service location across all Toll Free numbers terminating to the same service location; and, Location by Toll Free, i.e., for a specific service location, shows each Toll Free number terminating to this location. The originating NPA/Country Code summary reports provide information by NPA and Country for each Toll Free number attached to the report.

Additionally available are what are called Call Detail Exception Reports/images which provide reporting information pertaining to the following: Completion Rate and Retry (A,D,W,M); Completion Rate and Retry with Queue Abandonment (A,D,W,M); Lost Caller and Retry (A,D,M); Lost Caller and Retry with Queue Abandonment (A,D,M); Most Frequent Calling Numbers (A,D,W,M); Most Frequent Calling NPA/NXX (A,D,W,M); Most Frequent Calling Country (A,D,W,M) .

The nMCI Interact Exception reports (images) includes: Completion Rate and Retry (A,D,W,M);

Completion Rate and Retry with Queue Abandonment (A,D,W,M) ; Lost Caller and Retry (A,D,M) ; Lost Caller and Retry with Queue Abandonment (A,D,M) ; Most Frequent Calling Numbers (A,D,W,M); Most Frequent Calling NPA/NXX (A,D,W,M); and, Most Frequent Calling Country (A,D,W,M) . The nMCI Interact Exception reports (data) includes: Call Detail by Originating ANI (A,D,W,M);

Call Detail by ID Code (A,D,W,M) ; Call Detail by NCR Indicator (A,D,W,M); Call Detail by Originating State (A,D,W,M); Call Detail by Disposition (A,D,W,M) ; Call Detail by Service Location (A,D,W,M); Payphone Summary (A,M). Downloadable nMCI interact Call Detail reports

-103SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/2O173 includes Traffic view call detail (available as ad-hoc and daily) and Outbound traffic view call detail data (available as ad-hoc, daily and weekly).

As mentioned, via TCP/IP messaging, the TVS system 550 receives a request in real-time from the nMCI Interact StarOE component 285 to begin collecting call detail records for a particular TVS/Unpriced reporting customer, which number had been previously assigned during the order entry process. When a customer discontinues Unpriced Reporting for a number, this information is entered in StarOE tables where it is stored for a predetermined period subsequent to termination of the number. After the predetermined period of time, e.g., seven days, the numbers scheduled for service deletion are passed to TVS via TCP/IP connectivity in real time. After receiving this information, TVS instructs the GSE 504 in real time to stop collecting CDRs for these numbers.

Figure 21 illustrates a generalized block diagram detailing the internal TVS data acquisition processes. As shown in Figure 21, a TVS server GSE__TCR_RCVR process 564 receives a group of TCR records from the GSE component 504. The GSE_TCR_RCVR process 564 inserts that group into a DMQ (DecMessageQueue) queue 553a that provides a guaranteed message delivery. Upon successful storing of a record into the DMQ queue 553a, the GSE__TCR_RCVR process 564 sends an acknowledgment to the GSE component 504 so that it may delete that group. If TVS fails to acknowledge this group after a predetermined timeframe, the GSE continues to resend

-104SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 this group until an acknowledgment is received. The TCR_DISTRIB process 566 reads groupings of records and distributes a record based on the toll-free number associated with that record in the following manner:

First, as the reference database 551 contains information on which toll-free number belongs in which CDR database associated with the TVS server, records are grouped for each CDR database 561a,561b,..,561n, to which they belong. The reference database 551 additionally flags which numbers are to have statistics collected for them. Thus, an additional group of records is created and may be routed to a DMQ Queue 553b which inputs these records into a statistics stats counter process 570 for statistics processing, as will be described in greater detail herein. When all the records in the group have been read, each group is written to it's DMQ queue 554a,554b,..,554n associated with its destination database CDR Database 561a, 561b,..,561n. For instance, via a TCR Poster process 555a, records destined for CDR database 561a are forwarded from the DMQ Queue 554a. Particularly, each CDR poster process 555a, 555b,..,555n reads data from it's corresponding DMQ Queue and formats &amp; stores those records in their database.

With further regard to the stats counter 570 shown in Figure 21, TCRs are rolled up into statistics records. Specifically, the stats counter 570 keeps counts of the following: summary information about each toll free number for an hour; summary information

-105SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 about each toll free number and termination for an hour; and, summary information about each toll free number and origination NPA for an hour. These statistics are kept in memory for a pre-determined amount of time, e.g., one hour. As matching records come in, statistics are updated. At the end of the time period, these records are written to the statistics database 571, and particularly high speed electronic data drives.

The statistics that are gathered for each subscriber's toll-free number in the TVS system of the invention include: total completions, total call duration, total attempts, total switch control call, total Network Control System (NCS) blocked, total NCS rejected, total network blocked (all routes busy), total supp code blocked, and out-of-band blocked.

Additionally, statistics gathered for NP table processing include: originating NPA, total attempts per NPA, total calls completed (tcc) per NPA, total call not delivered (blocked) per NPA, total attempts for International Originations, tcc for International Originations (10), total calls not delivered (blocked) for 10,

Additionally, call statistics for terminations include: termination type, termination address, total completions, total call duration, and call dispositions indicating the cause of an incomplete call including: total short calls, total didn't write, and total didn't answer.

-106SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

With more particularity regarding the statistics database design, and, in further view of Figure 21, the stats_—counter 570 contains processes that read ICR's from a DMQ queue, and create statistics records for input to c_tables in the statistics database 571.

The algorithms implemented in TVS stats„counter process 570 are for generating statistics data tables so that TCR records may be processed in batches. The processes include: a summary table process which process generates statistics for call summary data; a NPA table process; Country table process and Termination table process. The stats_counter 570 enables multiple processes to be run at the same time on the same machine. To allow an arbitrary number of Stats__Counter processes, the stats databases are organized as a series of configurable tables, e.g., C_Tables 572, which are temporary tables that the stats counters first insert records to. These tables are identical to normal statistics tables with the exception that they include a field for the date in them. In accordance with the provision of C_tables, a pending_stats_list table and stats_table_usage_list table are used to keep track of what data is in the C_tables, and to drive the movement of data from the C__tables to a more permanent database tables 574.

Particularly, when the stats_counter process 570 starts, it performs a check of the set of c__tables by inserting its process name in the used_by_process field of the stats__table_usage_list table. If the stats__counter process unexpectantly dies, it reclaims the tables previously used by searching the

-107SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 stats_table__usage_list for tables marked with it's process name. The stats_counter process adds an entry into the pending_stats_list every time it creates stats for a new day. The usage_flag is initially set to 1 in that table. At the top of the hour, for example, the stats_counter processes marks all of the usage_flag entries to 2, and modifies the value of the used_by_process field in the stats__table„usage__list to MOVER. The stats_counter process then searches the stats_.table__usage_list for another set of tables to use for the next hours counting. If the stats_counter process cannot find a set of tables, it aborts. To avoid this, there is extra sets of c_tables configured with entries in the stats_table__usage_JList.

In a pending_stats_list table which comprises a directory of what the stats_counter is working on, or finished with, Each record represents a name of a c_table that contains statistics, and dates that are contained in this c„table. The report generator process, and on-line access use this table to determine if there is any data in the c_tables that they may be interested in, and what the table name is. The Stats_counter processes insert records into this table, and data_mover processes 573, shown in Figure 21, remove entries from this table.

An example stats_table_usage_list table comprises a list of all the eatables that are configured and used by the stats_counter processes and data_mover processes to allocate tables amongst themselves. The number of records in this table remains static. Stats_counter processes 570 update the used_by_process field with

-108SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 their process name when they are in control of that table. At the top of the hour, they may change the used—by_process to MOVER, and attempt to find another table that is unallocated. The movers change the used_by—process name to NONE when they have completed moving data from that c_table.

In the preferred embodiment, there are four types of movers are currently configured to run: NPA, summary, country, and termination. Each type of mover looks in the pending—stats__list for the name of the c_table” of the same type with a usage__flag of ”2, for instance, and the earliest date. The mover then transfers the data for this date from the c_table” to appropriate the permanent table. When the data transfer is finished, the matching record in pending_stats_list is deleted. If there are no more entries for this c_table in pending— stats_list, the mover process takes the precautionary step of searching the ”c_table for additional data that was not noted in pending—stats—list. Entries are then added to pending—stats—list for any data found in the c_table. If no additional data is found, used by process in stats—table__usage_list is changed from MOVER to NONE for this c_table.

The interaction between StarWRS web-based reporting system and TVS system 550 will now be explained in greater detail with respect to Figure 22. In the preferred embodiment, reports may be triggered by two possible sources: Scheduled report setup by a CORE order; and, real time report requests as forwarded from the report request/Report Manager Server 250. The

-109SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 report generation process is hereinafter described with respect to real-time reports from the StarWRS system.

As mentioned, requests are received in real-time from the Report Manager Server 250 which either passes on-demand reports from an end-user, or reports that it has internally scheduled via Report scheduler server 260. In the TVS server 550, a report manager proxy process 250'' gathers information about the reports to be generated from the reference database 551 by determining whether the report request may be fulfilled by statistics processing, or the CDR's. If CDR's are needed, a determination is then made as to which database contains the necessary data. Additionally determined is whether the needed CDR data to fulfill the request spans a long period of time, e.g., several days. Once these determinations are made, the requests are sent from the report manager proxy process 250'' to the appropriate DMQ queue 554a,554b,.., 554n, or 553b where they are queued up for report generation.

For the scenario requiring generation of call detail data reports, i.e., those requiring Call detail records, the destination of the report,

Inbox server 270, fax, U.S. mail, etc., from the reference database 551.

e.g., StarWRS is determined

Then, the requested data is gathered based on the metadata request, analyzed, and formatted by various corresponding detail report generator processes indicated in Figure 11 as processes 559a,.., 559n. Although not shown in Figure 11, it should be understood that reference data that originates from CADB and COMS may be necessary to complete these reports. Furthermore, although not

-110SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 shown, the TVS server is provided with an additional set of queues and report generator processes for each of the CDR processing to allow longer reports to not interfere with shorter reports.

In the detail report generator processes, the data is formatted in a comma separated value (CSV) format and are input to a finished report files database 582 whereupon, an inbox server interface process 583 FTPS the report to the nMCI Interact Inbox Server 270. The Inbox interface will particularly input the completed report to the pre-defined directory in the Inbox database. Particularly, the Inbox is notified via TCP/IP that the report is complete by the Inbox Interface process and that the appropriate metadata is available for report presentation via the report viewer.

If the requested report is destined for MCI Mail delivery (Fax, Mail, US Mail): then the data is formatted with headers, page breaks, line numbers into a report that is saved to a file. The report is then sent to an Internet Gateway 279, e.g., the MCI Mail Internet Gateway directly from the detail report generators 559a,..,559n for delivery by MCI Mail. Once the file is successfully sent it is deleted, thus allowing for report generation to continue when the MCI Mail Internet Gateway is not available.

An identical process is implemented for those customer report requests for aggregate data, i.e., statistics. However, the data that is gathered and analyzed is retrieved from a summary report generator process 581 which retrieves the requested report data

-111SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 from the statistics database 571 upon a receipt of a report request from the DMQ 553b.

As described herein, when the user requests call detail for a particular period of time, this request is translated by the StarWRS component into a metadata file which is sent to TVS in the manner described herein. Users schedule reports for execution using the Report Scheduler in StarWRS in the manner as described herein. When the user has completed report selection, modifications and scheduling, the StarWRS Report Scheduler component 260 creates a metadata message comprising this information which file is passed to TVS in real time. The TVS then uses this file to formulate a query and runs the report for the scheduled time period.

After TVS runs the report, TVS sends the report to the Inbox server component 270 of StarWRS immediately after they are completed.

RTM

As further shown in Figure 18, the nMCI Interact's web-based front-end and middle-tier TVS system infrastructure 500 implements processes enabling customers to monitor in real time, their network traffic call detail statistics, in real time, via TCP/IP connections 293 and 294. As shown, customer requests are entered by the customer 100 via an RTM graphic user interface and preferably communicated over secure TCP/IP socket connections for input over the firewall 25 to at least one secure server, e.g., a DMZ RTM Web Server 52 (Figure 2) that provides for

-112SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

<img file="CA2304543A1_D0008.tif" />

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 authentication, validation, and session management in the manner as described herein.

Particularly, the user first establishes communication with the RTM Web server 52 (Figure 2), Dispatcher and StarOE systems to enable logon, authentication and verification of Real Time traffic Monitor entitlements, as described above with respect to Figures 4-6. If the customer subscribes to Real Time Monitor, a Traffic Monitor icon 85 (Figure 5(a)) is automatically enabled when the home page appears.

The process flow 700 for implementing real time monitoring of a customer's network traffic is shown in Figures 23 (a)-23(b). Preferably, as shown in Figure 23(a), in response to selecting the RTM function, at step 721, a hot link connection to the TVS CGI/HTML implementation of RTM is made to initiate a security/authentication process for the Unpriced data RTM products for which the customer is provisioned. With more particularity, the user connects to the RTM URL. and checks the RTM Web Server implementing an HTTP Post method. In response, the RTM Web Server generates a cookie and implements the RTM Web Server common gateway interface protocol (CGI) to send a validation request to TVS via TCP/IP with the cookie. The TVS server 550 validates the logon request by referencing Level of Service tables (not shown) provided in the Traffic View server that confirm the customer is enabled for RTM, as indicated at step 729. The TVS server stores user information with the cookie, and returns the validation information to the Web Server. Next, via CGI, an HTML page is sent to the user as

-113SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 indicated at step 731 presenting the user with an RTM screen and menu options, as indicated at step 735, thus allowing customer access to all RTM functionality which that user is entitled. As will be explained, this functionality includes interaction with the RTM application to formulate and transmit requests and receive the results. For example, the user may select the toll-free numbers to be tracked, enter a polling period, and define the call detail statistics desired.

Particularly, selection of the traffic monitor icon enables display of the traffic monitor profile list page 760, shown in Figure 23(c), which presents a list of the user-defined profiles 762 for which real time monitoring functions 763 may be invoked. Particularly, from the web page 760, a user may activate a real time monitoring function by selecting an activate button 764, edit an existing RTM profile by selecting button 766, or delete an existing RTM profile by selecting button 768. Additionally, a user may create a new RTM profile for a new toll-free number, by selecting an add profile button 759.

Upon selection of the add profile button 769, a new dialog window 770, such as the example window shown in Figure 23(d), is presented which may allow a customer to enter desired RTM profile parameters for a selected toll-free (inbound) number 775b including: a profile name 772, a time zone 774, and, a polling interval 776, which specifies the time interval in which statistics data is to be gathered by the GSE and which, in the preferred embodiment, may be down to a one (1) minute interval. Particularly, a customer may

-114SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 be presented with a list of available numbers 775a from which a number may be selected for profile generation.

It should be understood that a profile selected from the profile list page 760 (Figure 23(c)), may be edited upon selection of a profile edit button 766. An edit profile page will be presented to the customer that is similar to the add profile page 770 (Figure 23(d)). Thus, from the dialog shown in Figure 23(d), the profile parameters of an existing RTM profile for a particular number, may be modified.

Referring back to Figure 23 (c), upon selection of the activate button 764 for a selected profile, an active profile web page 780 will be displayed, such as shown in Figure 23(e), which presents the real-time summary data for the selected toll free number/profile. As shown in Figure 23(e), the active profile web page 780 is broken down into three sections: a first section 782 displaying profile summary data for the selected toll-free number including call attempts, call completes, call incompletes, blocked, NCR, average duration and total duration; a second section 784 displaying a summary breakdown cf the call incompletes for the selected profile including busy, (all trunks busy) ATB, short calls, didn't waits, or didn't answers; and, a third section 786 displaying other summary data not presented in the first two sections such as network congestion, ID codes, payphone blocked, etc. It is from this screen that a customer may view real-time information pertaining to their toll-free network usage, and make informed business decisions regarding call-routing plans.

-115SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

As further shown in Figure 23 (e), the customer may select a start time button 785 enabling selection of a specific time for which real-time traffic statistics are to be gathered for presentation to the customer. Thus, upon selection of the start time button 785, a set start time web page 790 will be displayed, such as shown in Figure 23(f), which enables specification of a start date from a drop-down menu 792, and specification of a start time from a drop-down menu 794.

Likewise, as further shown in Figure 23(e), the customer may select a polling interval specifying the time interval at which the summary data displayed on the active profile web page may be updated. Thus, upon selection of the start time button 787, a set polling interval page 795 will be displayed, such as shown in Figure 23(g), enabling selection of a polling interval, e.g., in minutes, from a drop-down menu 796, for which real-time, statistical network traffic data is to be refreshed for display on the active profile page 780 (Figure 23(e)).

Furthermore, as shown in the active profile page display of Figure 23(e), the customer may select an Inquiry button 789 enabling a display of selected RTM call disposition parameters for the current selected RTM profile. Thus, upon selection of the inquiry button 789, an inquiry request page 797 will be displayed, such as shown in Figure 23(h), enabling further inquiry selection/and or modification of RTM parameters for the selected profile 762 including: the inbound telephone number, start date, end date, report size limit, time zone, start time and end time.

-116SUBSTÎTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

Additionally, further call disposition parameters 778 may be inquired into for display in the active profile page of Figure 23(e) including: call answered, supp code blocked, switch control blocked, dialed number failure, ring no answer, out of band blocked, network blocked, range privilege failure, didn't wait, (network control system) NCS reject, busy, payphone blocked, didn't answer, NCS blocked, and all trunks busy. Particularly, upon selection of the submit button 777 of display 797, an inquiry results page 798 will be presented, such as shown in Figure 23 (i), which displays the collected raw real-time call detail statistic data in display line format 799 for the selected RTM profile.

As further shown in Figure 23 (i), the customer may select a CDR detail link 791 to invoke a display showing the details of a specific call detail record, such as the example display 793 shown in Figure 23 (j) . Likewise, the customer may select an enhanced voice services (EVS) detail link 795 to invoke a display presenting the selected EVS details (not shown).

Thus, referring back to Figure 23(b), the customer is enabled to select or modify his/her predefined RTM use profile, as indicated at step 740, Figure 23(a). Specifically, the customer may create or edit their user profile, for example, by entering selection criteria such as: 800/8xx or Vnet number to report, a polling interval, and time zone. The user may also delete a user profile. The entered selection criteria may be saved by the subscriber as a new user profile for storage in the TVS server Level_of_use tables, as

-117SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 indicated at steps 744 and 745, or submitted directly to the TVS server, as indicated at steps 749 and 750. It should be understood that all TVS RTM functionality may be available to the customer.

If, at step 740, the subscriber has selected a previously defined use profile, as indicated at step 747, the subscriber may modify the profile, i.e., 800/8xx or VNET number to report, polling interval, and define statistics, as indicated at step 748, and submit it directly to the TVS server, as indicated at steps 749 and 750 (Figure 23(b)).

At this point, the user can interact with the RTM application to formulate a request, transmit it and receive the results according to the user-selected toll-free number(s) to be tracked, polling period and defined statistics desired.

Briefly, after receiving the request, at step 752, Figure 23(b), the TVS formulates a query and submits the query to the call detail database which is the repository of all call detail records for the particular number selected. The TVS server selects the call detail data in accordance with the user profile or selection at step 754, and passes the data to the RTM Web Server which formats the data into an HTML table, as indicated at step 756. This HTML table is sent to the user's browser at step 758 and the process continues at step 759 for each successive polling interval until the user terminates the request.

As mentioned, the networkMCI Interact Real-time Traffic Monitor provides a customer with a real-time summary display of calls made to their toll-free

-118SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

<img file="CA2304543A1_D0009.tif" />

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCI7US98/20173 numbers. This information is displayed on the Active

Profile page 780 such as shown in Figure 23(e), which may be automatically refreshed at a specified polling interval of, e.g., 1 to 30 minutes. This value is selectable by the user upon profile creation. The information on the Active Profile page is refreshed at this interval by the user's browser (a client pull operation). This happens automatically because the Active Profile page contains an HTML Refresh meta tag which tells the user's browser software to re-display the current page after the indicated number of seconds has passed.

Figure 24 is an illustration depicting the nMCI Interact RTM polling process. As shown in Figure 24, the RTM system supports an HTML form Post or automatic refresh, to an active server page script. Thus, a Web page providing real-time unpriced call detail data has a timeout interval, e.g., one minute or greater, at which point the Web browser 20 will re-post a request for data (HTTP Post). The Post request is received by an Internet Information (web) Server (IIS) process 590 in the RTM server 52 that executes an active server page (.asp) script. This .asp script calls a DLL polling routine 593 via a communications (COM) interface. This polling DLL is a

Visual C++ application running in the RTM Web server

52. Upon receipt of the timeout request, the DLL calls the TVS server 550 for real-time call detail data retrieval via TCP/IP messaging. Particularly, the call detail request is received by a RTM data retrieval process 595 executing in the TVS server 550. Then, the

-119SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 real time data for each phone number (e.g., 800/8xx or VNET) is retrieved from the call detail database 598, which is the repository of real-time call detail data. The retrieved real time data is returned to the polling DLL process 593 and the current RTM output is formatted by the polling DLL and printed to the HTML page. The HTML page with the script-embedded HTML is then communicated back to the Web Browser 20 via the IIS process 590.

In the preferred embodiment, the RTM server 52 application dynamically adjusts the number of seconds appearing in the meta tag of the summary display page, which feature allows the user's display to stay in sync with their selected polling interval regardless of how long the polling operation took for the last poll. When the user's browser requests a refresh, the dataretrieval software on the RTM web server 52 starts a timer, when the data-retrieval software has obtained the data necessary to lay out the next Active Profile page, it stops the timer. The page is then laid out with a Refresh meta tag containing a value of the polling interval less the amount of time, e.g., seconds, the data - retrieval process took. Finally, the page is sent back to the user's browser. For example, if the current profile has a 1 minute polling interval and the data-retrieval process took 3 seconds, then the next refresh will begin in 1 minute minus 3 seconds, or 57 seconds. During the next refresh, the dataretrieval process may take 5 seconds, in which case the next refresh will begin in 55 seconds. Without the dynamic refresh functionality, if the refresh rate were

-120SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 left at the full polling interval each time, the polling would drift forward in time.

In sum, a subscriber via a client workstation running a Web browser can monitor in real time, or, in addition, using the RTM system, has the ability to monitor in substantially real time, the operation of the network as it relates to the calls directed to that subscriber's special service call number(s). For example, the subscriber may see in real time how many calls are being attempted minute by minute, how many calls are being allowed through the network, how many calls are incompletes, how many calls are blocked, etc.

This ability to monitor the operation of the network gives the subscriber the ability to decide in real time the specific actions that need to be taken. For instance, if there is an abnormal number of incompletes for a given period, the subscriber can look at the specific call records that made up those incomplete calls. In the manner described herein, the subscriber may then request the management of the network to restructure the network so as to reroute the incoming calls of the subscriber to different locations where they may better be handled.

Service Inquiry

Another application of the suite of telecommunications network applications is the networkMCl Interact Service Inquiry (SI) application which is a web-based network management product that enables customers to manage, i.e., create, status, and

-121SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 display service requests (trouble tickets), to the enterprise service provider (MCI). Particularly, through a client application GUI, customers have the ability to create and query trouble tickets (tickets).

Figure 2 illustrates the service inquiry SI application server 36 interfacing with a backend Customer Service Management (CSM) legacy host system 40(a). The SI application server component 36 includes processes for handling all requests made of Service Inquiry by the customer (as relayed via the Dispatcher 26) . Specifically, requests are handed off to Service Inquiry back-end processes and responses are received from the Service Inquiry back-end processes to be routed back through the Dispatcher to the client workstation web browser 20.

As in any of the above-described suite of telecommunications network applications, the Service Inquiry application utilizes the Common Objects application framework (COF) to inter-operate with the networkMCl Interact back plane and integrate with the other elements of the networkMCl Interact architecture. The Common Objects framework is utilized to leverage existing infrastructure services such as logon and authentication, transaction management, and security. Particularly, the Service Inquiry application extends the COAppImpl class in order to inter-operate with the Interact back plane and other networkMCl Interact applications (as required), and, includes one or more screens derived from the COAppFrame class. Most of the high level classes dealing with the initiation of

-122SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 transactions are utilized by Service Inquiry. The COClientSession class is available to the Service Inquiry application upon successful login to the networkMCI Interact system and is utilized for session management (e.g., connect, disconnect, and logoff).

The family of COTransaction classes is used to send and receive messages to the backend Service Inquiry service. These classes include CONonblockTransaction, COSynchTransaction, and COAsynchTransaction and, a COBulkTransaction may also be used if necessary. Additionally, the SI utilizes all of the COCommunications classes with the exception of the COBulkTransaction. However, as development and testing continues, the COBulkTransactions class may be utilized.

Figure 25(a) illustrates the high-level design of the Service Inquiry application 2200 including the client application 2250 and server 2300 components. As shown, Service Inquiry requires integration with a number of external systems and utilizes the Common Objects Framework for inter-application communications. Interfacing with the Service Inquiry application server 36 via the common objects framework are the StarOE server, e.g., for user profile information, as well as other Service Inquiry specific data, and, the CSM legacy host that provides the ability to query, status, and take action on service inquiries. Communication between the SI application server 36 and CSM 40(a) is via Registry middleware. Figure 3 shows COF-based inter-application communication between Service Inquiry and StarOE. It should be understood that if an

-123SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCTZUS98/20173 external system does not use the COF, Service Inquiry may utilize that system's API set and communication mechanism for inter-application communication. The above-referenced Registry system has a number of options for inter-application communication, including both Java and CORBA interfaces.

The Service Inquiry communications and application server packages provide the framework for transporting client messages to the mid-tier application server for 10 invocation of domain objects. The domain objects encapsulate the logic to translate the actual client messages and deliver the request to the backend services. The response from the backend service is then received by the application server and returned to 15 the originating client. The framework enables customers to develop the business logic independent of the underlying transport layer and negate the need to modify the transport layer whenever a new domain model is introduced into the framework. The separation of 20 the framework from the domain is accomplished through the use of reflection by dynamically loading and executing the business logic at the application server once the client request specification is received.

As described herein, the SI application server 25 2300 interfaces with the Legacy Backend 40(a), CSM/SI through a Requester object 2310 and Receiver object 2350 as shown in Figure 25(b). Particularly, the SvcInqCSMRequester object 2310 is the class that represents the requester which takes the request data 30 that comes from the Front-End/Client application through the Transaction Manager 2320, builds the CSM/SI

-124SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 request transactions by interacting with the Translator classes 2380 and ships off the requests to CSM. The request data that comes from the Front End/Client is an array of strings that are required from the customer for the request to be made. Minimal information is passed from the client to reduce the communication overhead from the client to the SI application server. All other information is packaged in the Requester. Particularly, the Requester object 2310 uses the SvcInqRegistryHeader and SvcinqSIHeader classes in the Translator 2380 to build the Registry Header and SI Header strings that are required for the CSM/SI request transactions. It also talks to the SvcInqActivity or the SvcInqRemarks classes to build the data portion of the CSM/SI requests. Once the CSM/SI Transaction String is formatted the actual request to CSM is made. Sending the transaction to CSM's Standard Interface (SI) via Registry classes does this.

The receiver object is an instance of the SIRegistryHandler class whose responsibility is to obtain the responses from CSM, parse the response, strip off the headers and build objects from the response data, by interacting with the Translator classes 2380. Particularly, it uses the SvcInqRemark, the SvcInqActivity, the SvcInqTroubleTicket or the SvcInqRegistryEntry class in the Translator to build the remark, activity, detail or list of Ticket object from the response string that is received from CSM. The built object is then sent back to the Transaction

-125SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26}

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

Manager 2380 who passes it back to the Front-End/Client.

Figure 25(b) illustrates a flow diagram depicting the execution of a transaction by the SI application server 36 with each bubble representing a separate thread. First, at step 2501, the SI Application Server 36 instantiates and starts the Transaction Manager 2500 in a separate thread. The SI Application Server then instantiates and starts the Transaction Server 2500 in a separate thread at step 2502. The SI Application Server 36 instantiates and starts the Registry Server in a separate thread at step 2503.

More particularly, as shown in Figure 7 (a), the Transaction Server receives a client transaction request, as shown at step 2504. The connection is accepted and Transaction Handler thread is removed from the thread pool for execution, as indicated at 2505. The Transaction Handler unpackages the transaction request at step 2506 and puts the request message into the Transaction Manager's RequestQ. The Transaction Manager 2600 removes the request message from its RequestQ at step 2507 and spawns a Transaction Exécuter thread to execute the transaction. Then, at step 2508, the Transaction Exécuter translates the message and executes the transaction by loading the domain class and invoking the specified method which send the request to the backend services.

As indicated at step 2509, the backend service responds by sending the result of the transaction to the Registry Server which accepts the connection. At step 2510, a Registry Handler is removed from the thread pool for execution for performing translation of

-126SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 the received message and placing the result into the

Transaction Manager's ResponseQ, as indicated at step

2511. The Transaction Handler retrieves the transaction result from the ResponseQ at step 2512 and the transaction response is delivered to the client at step 2513.

The mainframe legacy backend 40(a) Registry is the cross-platform communication mechanism that is used by Service Inquiry to send messages to and receive messages from the CSM host. It shields applications from network protocols. CSM is provided with a mainframe database (not shown) that provides a set of Transactions to request CSM information through its Standard Interface (SI) which uses Registry as the messaging system. The Service Inquiry Application

Server 2300 is configured to communicate asynchronously with CSM using Registry's RQS as the Inter-Process Communication (IPC) mechanism. Since CSM supports only one-way messaging, the communication between Service

Inquiry and CSM/SI is asynchronous. When CSM 40(a) receives a request from the Requester, it does not send any acknowledgment back to the requester. The requester only receives a confirmation from Registry that the request was successfully sent. When CSM finishes processing the request, it sends the response to the

Receiver.

Registry configuration consists of configuring the Registry client which sends request messages to CSM from the Service Inquiry Requester and Registry server 30 that receives responses from CSM and passes it to the

Service Inquiry Receiver. As shown in Figure 25(b) the

-127SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

Registry Queuing system, RQS is an asynchronous mode of inter process communication where there is one queue on the client and one on the server and there is only one TCP/IP connection always open between the client and the server. The client puts its requests on its own local queue 2322 and it is then forwarded to the queue on the server. The server takes the request off the queue, processes the request and the response messages are put in the client's queue 2325. Since there is only one TCP/IP connection at any given time between the client and the server this mode is very efficient in terms of both network and system resources.

As in the other application of the nMCI Interact suite, the Service Inquiry client application is written as a Java application to be executed at the client web browser running, for example, Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0, The Service Inquiry client will be started from the networkMCI Interact homepage upon selection of the service inquiry icon 91 shown in the home page 70(a) of Figure 5(a).

Figure 25(c) illustrates an example service inquiry main screen 2400 presented upon entry into the SI system selection. As shown in Figure 25(c), the Service Inquiry display 2400 presents a title bar, menu bar, tool bar, work area, and message window to provide the user alternative ways to manage different components of Service Inquiry product. It should be understood that any action available from the tool bar will also be available within the menu bar.

Preferably, there are two permission levels that a user can have: 1) a View permission allowing a user to view

-128SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/Ï9803 PCT/US98/20173 the Service Inquiry application desktop (Default Query), define Service Inquiry queries, view the details, remarks and activities, print, and report; and, 2) an edit permission allowing a user to create trouble tickets, refer out trouble tickets, close trouble tickets, add remarks to trouble tickets, and, update trouble tickets.

With more particularity, the menu bar 2410 consists of the following items that correspond to the associated functionality: a File option 2410a including selections for creating a new ticket or new query, opening an existing query, saving a query being edited; printing and exiting the SI service; an Edit option 2410b including selections for querying on a specific ticket number, closing a currently selected ticket, or referring back to a currently selected ticket; a View option 2410c including selections for showing details of a currently selected ticket, and refreshing current query results; a Tools option 2410d including selections for sorting tickets in the active window; and, a Help option. The tool bar 2450 provides a Create button 2451 for creating a new ticket, a Query button 2452 for generating a new query, and, a find button 2453 enabling queries on a specific ticket number.

The Query component of the Service Inquiry application enables Service Inquiry users to query trouble ticket information within the system, i.e., the listing or viewing of tickets based on, e.g., different selection criteria. This component also allows provides users with the ability to add remarks to

-129SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

<img file="CA2304543A1_D0010.tif" />

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 tickets. A Default Query functionality is provided that allows users to keep a dedicated query available at all times. This query enables users to monitor the subset of tickets that are of most interest to them. A refresh mechanism is additionally provided so that the user may keep up with as current a status of these tickets as needed. The Default Query may be executed and displayed immediately on startup of the Service Inquiry application and is available throughout the Service Inquiry session. Preferably, the Service Inquiry application includes a set of predefined queries, one of which is preset as the Default Query and which may be redefined at any time. The user can only set their Default Query from a saved query.

To create a new query, e.g., upon selection of the Query button 2452 from the tool bar 2450, a Criteria window is displayed such as the example window display 2460 shown in Figure 25(d) which enables the customer to select from among the following criteria to be used in the query: priority, status, identifier, open date, and ticket number. As criteria are selected from the CRITERIA tab 2462, new tabs (not shown) appear that are associated with the selected criteria. It is from these tabs that the actual parameters are specified for which the query is executed against. As the query is built, the parameters that are selected will populate themselves in the table 2464 to the right of the tabbed panel. At any point in this selection process, the user may perform the following: move back and forth to any criteria tab by selecting the Back and Next buttons

-130SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

2461a, 2461b respectively, or selecting the desired tab directly; add or remove criteria tabs by selecting or deselecting the associated checkbox from the CRITERIA tab 2462; execute the query by selecting the Execute button 2461c; save the query by selecting the Save As button 2461d; remove highlighted parameters in the table by selecting the Remove button 2461e; or, remove all parameters in the table by selecting the Remove All button 2461f.

As an example, a List Tickets by Status Request transaction will provide all the tickets for a given organization (ORG) code with the requested status and created after a specified date. The ORG code to be passed in this transaction is one of the selection criteria representing the originating organization or the organization where the ticket was created. The customer may choose from a list of ORGs that the customer has authority over and a primary ORG is obtained from every customer and is stored locally in the user profile. The resulting information from all of the tickets will be cached for future processing. Generally, only one type of status may be specified in a single request: Open, Closed, Referred or Cancelled status. If a customer has authority over more than one organization that customer is able to view tickets for any organization he/she has authority over. If a customer has access to a primary organization, then he/she has implied access to all the subordinate organizations meaning that the request will apply to the subordinate organizations as well. Furthermore, this transaction may only display some of the

-131SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 details/fields of the tickets which means that the data cached from this request may only be used to process the Queries on tickets. It cannot be used to view all the details of the tickets for which further CSM/SI transactions will have to be made as will be herein described.

Once the query is specified and executed, the Query Results window such as provided in the example window 2470 of Figure 25(e) is displayed to present the results of the query in a table 2472. Preferably, these results may be sorted by column by either clicking on the column in the table to sort by or by selecting Tools/Sort from the menu bar 2410. Selecting Tools/Sort from the menu bar will initiate display of a Sort window such as the example display 2475 shown in Figure 25(f) which is capable of a three level sort by column in the table. The table columns can also be reordered by dragging and dropping them to their desired locations. Details of a particular ticket may also be viewed.

The ability to save and retrieve queries allows a user to persist queries not only for the current session but for future sessions as well. This gives the user the ability to define a query once, then save it such that there will be no need to define it again,

i.e., all the user needs do is retrieve and execute it. To save a query, the user must first create the query and then select the Save As button which enables display of the Save As window such as the example window 2480 shown in Figure 25(g). This window ensblas a user to select from the list of existing saved

-132SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 queries or type a new name in entry field 2481. If an existing saved query is selected its query will be copied over and its name will refer to this new query. A checkbox 2482 is available to designate this new query as the Default Query. To retrieve a saved query, e.g., upon selection of the File/Open/Query from the menu bar 2410, an Open Query window such as the example window 2485 shown in Figure 25(h) is displayed which provides a list of all saved queries. Once the desired query is selected the user may perform the following: execute the query, i.e., run the query and display the results in the Query Results window or the Default Query window if the user selects it as their default query; or, edit the query by bringing up the Criteria window 2460 (Figure 25(d)) with the appropriate parameters already in the table.

The customer may then view the results of a query,

i.e., the details, remarks or activities of a Ticket chosen from a list of Tickets. To view the details of a ticket, the user may either select it from the query results and select View/Details from the menu bar or double click the ticket in the query results. Particularly, a Display Ticket Request Transaction (CSM/SI transaction) may be used to obtain the details, activities and remarks of a ticket. This transaction allows several display requests to be made, e.g., by setting corresponding flags to Ύ' . Whenever the customer wishes to view details, remarks or activities of a particular ticket, this request will be made with all the three flags set and the ticket number stuck

-133SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 into the SI header which will generate three or more responses. The Display Detail Response Transaction is a response that returns all the data elements corresponding to a given ticket in a Details window such as the example window 2490 shown in the Figure 25(i). This window 2490 provides information about the selected ticket including: ticket number, ticket priority, ticket status, ticket identifier, ticket product, ticket service, date occurred, trouble description, and organization (ORG). It should be understood that the number of data elements will be different for different types of tickets.

Alternately, to find a ticket, e.g., upon selection of the Find button 2453 from the tool bar 2450, the CSM/SI Transaction, Display Ticket Request Transaction is invoked, where the ticket number is passed on the request for handling as described above. It should be understood that, in the preferred embodiment, a Change Ticket Request Transaction may be implemented allowing the customer to change some of the fields of a ticket that is already created. This restriction is enforced by the GDI as this CSM/SI transaction does not impose any such conditions on the field being modified.

Remarks are comments added to a ticket for historical purposes and can aid in the resolution of the problem. A customer must be viewing the particular ticket's details that contain the remarks desired. The Display Remarks Response Transaction is a response that shows all the comments added on the ticket either by the customer or by the enterprise

-134SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 (MCI). The CSM legacy system supports public and private remark types. Thus, from the Details window 2490 shown in Figure 25 (i), the user may click on the Remarks button 2491 which will bring up the Remarks window such as the example window 2495 shown in Figure 25 (j). From the remarks window, the remarks for that ticket are displayed. It should be understood that remarks may be added to a ticket for historical purposes, e.g., to aid in the resolution of the problem. From the Remarks window the customer may click on the Add Remarks button 2496 which enables display of the Add Remarks window (not shown) which allows the customer to add remarks to that Ticket. Thus, by implementing an Add Remarks Request Transaction, the customer may add remarks on a ticket that is in an open status at any time. This may be used as a final step, just after creating a ticket, for example, to enable the customer to describe the trouble in his/her own words or add any comments. This transaction returns a success or failure response.

Activities are events that occur to a ticket throughout its lifecycle. These events include changing status, changing priority, and reassignment of the person working the ticket. The customer must be viewing the particular ticket's details that contain the activities desired. The Display Activity Response Transaction is a response that provides all the activities, i.e., actions that have been taken on the ticket. Specifically, from the Details window 2490 (Figure 25 (i)), the customer may click on the Activities button 2492 which will bring up the

-135SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 25)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

Activities window 2498 such as shown in the example screen display of Figure 25(k). From the activities window, the activities for that ticket are displayed. This is a useful transaction in checking the status of a ticket and, it aids in tracking a ticket as it shows which organization the ticket is currently in.

The create component of Service Inquiry application provides Service Inquiry customers with the ability to create a ticket within the system. The first step in the creation of a trouble ticket is to identify the Event-Type/Call-Type of the problem which is basically the way CSM handles different problem types and is required for most CSM/SI transactions. To do that the client front end asks the customer the problem/identifier type and then narrow down the problem by having the customer choose from a list of Product types, Service types and Trouble Descriptions as described herein with respect to Figure 25(1) . Based on these choices the system maps it to the correct Event-Type/Call-Type which mapping is done using database tables stored locally on the client. Once the Event-Type/Call-Type is determined, the data fields that correspond to that Event-Type/Call-Type is obtained from the database tables. The information required for all these fields is then gathered from the customer by presenting appropriate questions. Once all the required information is available, the system performs an Open Ticket Request Transaction and passes all of the data fields. The CSM legacy system then attempts to open a Trouble Ticket based on the data passed, and performs an Open Ticket Response

-136SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/2O173

Transaction to indicate if the ticket was created successfully along with the ticket number. Based on this response a confirmation message along with the ticket number is displayed to the customer.

As an example, to create a service request from scratch, the customer may select, for example, the Create button 2451 from the tool bar 2450 of Figure 25(c). This will initiate display of a Create window such as the example window 2500 shown in Figure 25(1) . From this window, the customer provides answers to the questions for each tab 2510 shown as questions 2512, and clicks the Next button 2514 when ready to go to the next set of questions. As the next tab appears, the answers from the previous tab populate the table 2515. The user may navigate via the Back and Next buttons or by using the tabs. In the preferred embodiment, the questions are dynamic depending on previous answers. Thus, if the user goes back and changes the answer to a question that later questions depend on, then those questions will be overwritten by the new set of questions. The user will be warned if this is the case.

Once the ticket is opened, it has to be referred out to a Customer Facing Organization to initiate the problem resolution process. To do this, the CSM system refers the ticket out to an organization obtained from the user up front and stored in the User Profile. This is done using an Enter Activity Request Transaction which allows the customer to enter different activities like 'Refer Out', 'Close', 'Refer Back' and 'Open' on a ticket by passing the appropriate activity code.

-137SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

Finally, the SI application allows the customer to close the ticket by using an Enter Activity Request Transaction described with respect to ticket creation. When a customer wishes to close a ticket, the system will make this transaction on behalf of the customer by passing the activity code for 'Close'. A customer is allowed to close a ticket only if it were created by that organization and if the ticket is currently in that organization, i.e., it has been referred out to that organization. Since only the organization that opened the ticket has authority to close it, once a ticket has been resolved the ticket is referred out to the customer's organization. If the customer is not satisfied with the problem resolution, that customer may refer the ticket back to the enterprise (MCI). This is also accomplished using the Enter Activity Request Transaction. Again,‘the system will make this transaction and pass the activity code for 'Refer Back' .

The creation of trouble tickets through Service Inquiry will now be described in greater detail in view of Figure 25(m). In the preferred embodiment, the Service Inquiry application implements a domain object model (DOM) 2600 that allows the collection of information regarding a problem with a product offered by MCI. The questions that need to be asked to open a ticket vary by product and problem type. In addition to specifying a problem with a particular product. Service Inquiry provides the user with the functionality to perform queries for Trouble Tickets and to view the details of Trouble Tickets. The DOM's

-138SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCI7US98/20173 responsibility is the creation and query of Trouble tickets and it accomplishes its tasks via interaction with the client presentation layer and interaction with the back-end systems. Information that is gathered via the presentation layer is used to construct backend transactions. The information returned from these backend transactions is formatted to DOM classes, which are forwarded to the presentation layer.

As shown in Figure 25(m), the TroubleTicket 2610 is the root of the Service Inquiry DOM. TroubleTicket instances contain identifying information that is used by the presentation layer to sort and filter a collection of TroubleTickets. The TroubleTicket class is responsible for accepting requests from the presentation layer, forwarding the requests to the backend and returning results to the presentation layer. In addition to maintaining identifying information, a Trouble Ticket also contains references to a QuestionTree 2620 and a Registry 2650.

Specifically, a Question Tree 2600 is comprised of three Domain Classes: QuestionTree 2620, Question 2630 and RegistryEntry 2640. QuestionTrees 2620 are essentially a set of questions for a particular product and problem type. The QuestionTree is responsible for the grouping of questions and the navigation between the groups. In addition, a QuestionTree knows if it has been completely specified, i.e.,. all of its required Questions have been answered. Within a QuestionTree, the group or category is designated by a unique name String). Preferably, questions are stored in a hashtable (not shown) . A group name is the key

-139SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 and a vector of Questions is the value for each entry in the hashtable. The order of the groups is significant and since hashtables do not maintain order, a vector of Group names is required. This Vector of names is used for some of the navigational behaviors of a QuestionTree.

The Registry 2650 is responsible for maintaining collections of objects that represent information retrieved from CSM via the client interface. The collections of objects represent Remarks, Details and Activities in CSM. Remarks and Details are also represented by vectors of instances of a RegistryEntry class. Activities are represented by a vector of instances of the Activity class 2660 which is an information holder having instance variables containing information that corresponds to fields in the CSM/SI Activity Record.

The RegistryEntry class is a class in the Serviceinquiry DOM comprising instances 2640a that are used by Question instances 2630 and instances 2640b,c used by Registry instances 2650. When used by a Question, RegistryEntry instances 2640 represent the possible choices for answers to the Question. Once the user selects a RegistryEntry choice, this RegistryEntry instance becomes the answer to the question. When used by a Registry, the RegistryEntry instances 2640b,c represent remark or detail information respectively, that is retrieved from CSM/SI. Specifically, RegistryEntry 2640a,b,c comprise the following instance variables: 1) a Text instance variable which is an optional variable used to specify

-140SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 text that will be presented to the user as a choice for an answer to a Question if the value is different than that specified by the registryvalue; 2) registryKey instance variable which maps to a key in CSM/SI; 3) a registryvalue instance variable which maps to the value in CSM/SI specified by the key in registryKey; 4) a nextGroupID instance variable which is an optional field used by the Question to assist the QuestionTree in some navigational tasks; and 5) a question instance variable which is a reference to the Question instance to which this RegistryEntry belongs. A RegistryEntry is contained by its Question; this instance variable is a back-pointer.

The Registry Classes, i.e., classes that represent CSM/SI Registry records, have two additional responsibilities that are variations of a single behavior. The Registry Classes (RegistryEntry and Activity) are used for communication between Service Inquiry and CSM/SI. CSM/SI requires Remark, Detail and Activity information in fixed-length field record format; Service Inquiry requires Remark, Detail and Activity information in Java object format (instances of RegistryEntry or Activity). To provide these two formats, the Registry Classes contain behavior to convert instances to fixed-length field record format and to instantiate themselves from fixed-length field record format.

Questions are the main component in a QuestionTree. A Question has a vector of group identifiers that indicate the groups to which it belongs. A Question has a vector of RegistryEntry

-141SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 instances 2640a called choices. When the user answers the Question, the answer is set to the selected choice; i.e., the selected RegistryEntry. Short answer or text answer questions are a specialization of this behavior. Within each group of Questions, there is one question that is designated as the decision point which is used to determine the next group of Questions that need to be presented to the user. As a Registry Entry may contain a nextGroupID, the nextGroupID of the RegistryEntry instance selected as an answer to a decision point Question is used to derive the next group of Questions. Occasionally, the only difference between two groups of Questions is the inclusion or exclusion of a particular Question. One solution is to create two identical groups, one with the optional question and one without and rely on the decision point mechanism. In the preferred embodiment, an optional parent-child relationship between Questions is created. The inclusion/exclusion of a Question (child) in a group is based on the answer to a previous Question (parent). A child Question maintains a reference to one of the possible choices (RegistryEntry) of the parent Question. If the parent Question's answer is the same as the child Question's parentAnswer, the child Question is included in the group; otherwise, it is excluded from the group.

TFNM

As mentioned above, another application of the suite of telecommunications network management applications is the toll free network management tool

-142SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

<img file="CA2304543A1_D0011.tif" />

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

800 as shown in Figure 26. Referred to herein as TFNM, the toll free network management tool 200 provides the client GUI and middle-tier service that enable customers to request, specify, receive and view data pertaining to their toll free network management assets, e.g., toll free number routing plans, and to generate orders for changing aspects of the routing plans via a World Wide Web interface. Particularly, customer directives are entered by the user 100 via a TFNM graphic user interface. These directives are preferably communicated as Java applets over secure TCP/IP socket connections for input over the firewall 25a to at least one secure Web server 24, e.g., a DMZ Web server that provides for authentication, validation, and session management in the manner as described herein. In view of Figure 26, as will be described, the TFNM tool 800 implements a TFNM domain server 840 which is one component part of a back-end MCI infrastructure comprising: MCI's NetCap system 240, a Service Control Manager 290a (SCM), and Data Access Points 290b (DAP). Particularly, the legacy NetCap order entry system 290 processes (i.e., edits, validates, logs) call routing feature orders for customer's 800/8xx traffic and submits orders to the Service Control Manager (SCM) which then formats and distributes orders to each of three redundant data access points (DAPS) which implements the plan orders at the network switches. Once an order is implemented on the DAPS, calls to the customer's 800/8xx number are processed with the features specified in the order.

-143SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

The TFNM server 840 interfaces with the NetCap 290 mainframe system that provides user interface to the network control system, i.e., DAP switches 290b. The TFNM domain server 840 includes Java object classes whose methods are invoked by Java applets running on the customer browser. The browser Java applets specifically execute the customer directives by invoking certain methods on the TFNM Domain server 840. These Java objects additionally provide the interface functions to the NetCap 240. Tn the preferred embodiment, the Java objects at the TFNM domain server function as a proxy, and are invoked remotely implementing a Java remote method invocation RMI-like methodology.

Particularly, as described herein with respect to Figure 3, within the networkMCI Interact framework for producing Java applications over the Internet, there is provided common objects and an infrastructure allowing secure communications between a client (which resides on a browser) and a server (which resides safely within MCI's firewalls). As briefly mentioned, the security strategy includes : encrypting communication from the client to the web-server via SSL (HTTPS) and implementing HTTPS as the preferred method for allowing communication into the web server from the Internet; providing an additional firewall between the web-server and the dispatcher to allow only specific traffic from the web server to the dispatcher to occur; encrypting traffic between the web server and the dispatcher via DSA encryption; and enabling the dispatcher to validate all packets destined to internal MCI servers to ensure

-144SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 25)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 that they are from an authenticated client, and that a particular client has permission to communicate with a specific back-end server. To make this seamless for the client, the aforementioned set of common objects performs this messaging. In the preferred embodiment, the invention implements a modified RMI which is referred to as CORMI (Common Objects RMI) which provides an RMI-like interface between the client and the server using the networkMCI Interact protocol. The CORMI procedures implemented have additional controls built in to provide the necessary session security and maintenance for communication over the firewalls.

More specifically, CORMI is nMCI Interact's protocol for providing secure, client-to-server communication with Java RMI-like semantics and comprises a library of Java classes used by both the client applet and server application. In view of Figure 26, the communication path from the client and the server is as follows:

The TFNM server application 840 registers remote objects with CORMI's CORemoteSessionServer (analogous to Java RMI's Registry service) and then blocks waiting for connections. The TFNM client applet initiates communication by performing a logon through a COClientSession object. The COClientSession creates a COSynchTransaction (an atomic unit of work based over an HTTPS socket) which connects to the MCI Interact system dispatcher server 835 (which is behind the outer firewall 25(b)) and interfacing with StarOE server 39. The dispatcher server 26 validates the client's authorization to logon (a process that involves

-145SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 contacting the StarOE service and generating a session key with a 'cookiejar' process). After validating the client, the dispatcher uses a round-robin protocol to select a TFNM server and then opens an HTTPS connection to an instance of the TFNM server application. On this server, the CORemoteSessionServer creates a new session for this client and records the session key.

A reply to a logon is sent back through the dispatcher server 235 to the client 20. The client then can do a lookup which results in a serialized remote interface of the remote object registered earlier being passed back to the client. The client can then use this remote interface as it would with Java RMl—doing remote method invocations. The remote method invocations are handled by CORMI as COSynchTransactions through the dispatcher to the same TFNM server instance that the logon and interface lookup took place at.

It should be understood that there is no permanent connection between the TFNM client and server; CORMI, through a COSynchTransaction, creates a new HTTPS connection to the dispatcher (and the dispatcher creates a connection to the TFNM server) for each unit of communication.

After the above-described logon, authentication and entitlement processes, the user is presented with the nMCI Interact home page (Figure 5(a)) whereby the user may select the Network Manager icon 89 to enter into the TFNM system. Upon selection of the Network Manager icon, a client TFNM application is downloaded to the customer who is presented with the TFNM web-page

-146SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 display 1640, such as shown in Figures 27 (a)-27(c). As shown, this TFNM web-page display presents a variety of TFNM file menu options including: 1) an option 1645 enabling a user to select a Corp ID, i.e., a corp, set, number, and plan to establish a working environment; 2) an option 1646 enabling a user to cut-through to a 3270 mainframe NetCap application; 3) an option 1647 enabling a user to Implement Plan, i.e., put a plan in use by creating an IMPL order; and, 4) an option 1648 enabling a user to modify the termination information on a plan by creating a QUIK order. As further shown in Figure 27(b), the open menu includes a Plan option 1642 which allows the user to select from a list of plans in the current working environment and enables opening of the plan in a graphical mode on a VORT (View Only Routing Tree), as will be explained; and a Tree View option 1643 which displays the last plan accessed on the VORT screen. As further shown in Figure 27 (c), the report menu includes an option 1644 for allowing the user to set up and execute an order filter query which results in the display of an order list, as will be hereinafter described in greater detail.

Thus, the customer is enabled to select a view of his/her routing plans in accordance with that user's privileges. To determine privileges, TFNM user security profile information is requested from StarOE that comprises a list of Corp Ids and Accessld combinations, referred to herein as RACF ID combinations that the customer is allowed to access within TFNM. Particularly, user security profile

-147SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

<img file="CA2304543A1_D0012.tif" />

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 elements obtained from StarOE include: Corp Id, i.e., the Corporation Id the customer user has access to within StarOE; and Defaultlnd , i.e., a default Carped indicator having, for example, Ύ' or 'N' values.

Once the customer has logged into TFNM and has received the StarOE security message, a communication is made from the TFNM server 840 to NetCap 290 requesting a user security profile. Particularly, the messaging system implemented for all communications between the TFNM server and NetCap is referred to herein as Registry. Security from NetCap is by Racf Id and Corp Id. For each Corp Id a user has access to, that user must have a Racf Id. If a user has Enterprise level security, then the list of Corps under that Enterprise within NetCap have the same security as the Enterprise. Particularly, in response to a user login, in the preferred embodiment, a TFNM server application is executed. From this application, the TFNM server instantiates a Profile Manager Java object which is registered with CORMI and called upon to invoke further objects relating to the following: user profile, e.g., preferences, user security profiles,

i.e., for tracking customer entitlements/ privileges including rights for creating or modifying specific TFNM routing plans or generating QUIK or IMPL orders; and, session management, i.e., objects which encapsulate the state and behavior associated with a specific user login, e.g., time logged in.

In the preferred embodiment, once profile manager is instantiated, the TFNM server additionally instantiates objects related to view screens and

-148SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

<img file="CA2304543A1_D0013.tif" />

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 options according to the user's entitlements/privileges. Specifically, a Corporation Manager (CorpMngr) object is invoked to enable the user to select the corporation having the desired routing plan to be looked at. Then, the following objects are sequentially invoked: a Set Manager object for the corporation selected; a Number Manager object that knows the TFNM numbers (e.g., l-800/8xx) belonging to the Set and/or Corp; and, a Plan Manager object, which knows the routing plans that belong to the selected corporation, set, and/or number selected by the user up to that point. It should be understood that the TFNM server is enabled to communicate with NetCap server for this data if not provided in the TFNM database, or, if the information in TFNM is not current. For instance, for some messages, a data sync may always be invoked. Thus, TFNM may contact NetCap and pass date and time stamps indicating the last update for the record. If NetCap determines that they have later data version, it will pass down the updated version, otherwise, it will pass an empty message back :o TFNM. Alternately, an internal table 845, as shown in Figure 26, may be accessed indicating the intervals for data record updates and which will indicate the last time a data sync was performed for a particular record. By checking this table, a determination may be made as to whether contact must be made to NetCap for a data update.

In the preferred embodiment, as shown in Figure 26, the TFNM server 840 communicates a plan/data sync message 843 via Registry messaging to NetCap. The

-149SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

Registry message call NPSNC is the request to sync a plan and is transmitted from the TFNM server to NetCap. There are a variety of Registry response messages for this request.

As shown in Figure 27(d), the File/Select Corp ID menu option causes a screen 1650 to be displayed in the web page that enables the user to select elements (Corp ID, Set ID, Routing Number) that invoke objects for establishing a working environment, or, to select a plan for view. The data elements displayed on this screen differ according to the type of plan chosen. In the preferred embodiment, the TFNM Network Manager component 800 enables the customer to create or modify orders for four types of TFNM routing plans: a Number Level Plan (NLP), Super Routing Plans (SRP), Enhanced Voice Service Routing plans (EVS), and universal routing plans (URP). As shown in Figure 27(d), Number Level, EVS, or Super Routing plan radio buttons 1655 may be selected to access corresponding visible screen elements. When an NLP plan is selected, for instance, the following elements are displayed: a Corp ID element 1656 which is a single selection list box that becomes populated with corp id's available to the user in accordance with that user's entitlements; a Set ID element 1657 which is a single selection list box populated with Set ID's that the user has security access to for a chosen Corp ID; a Number list box element 1658 which is a single selection list box populated with number information for the indicated corp./set; and, a Plan list box 1659 which is a single selection list box populated with plan information such

-150SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 as: a plan description, plan in use, or when the plan was last modified, for the selected number. It should be understood that corporate security is obtained from NetCap whenever a new Corp ID is selected, in the manner described.

In the preferred embodiment, using additional buttons 1652, 1653 and 1654 from the screen shown in Figure 27(d), the user respectively, is enabled to open or close the plan portion of the screen; save the selected corp/set/number/plan id as the user's current working environment; and/or display a tree view of the highlighted plan.

When the user chooses to view a selected routing plan, and after verifying security with both StarOE and NetCap, the TFNM server may execute the synch process with NetCap 290 as described above. During this process, TFNM updates any records in the TFNM searver copy of the customer's chosen routing plan with changes that were made in NetCap since the user last accessed the system. The TFNM server database is updated with the latest routing plan information for that customer, and the updated routing plan information is sent to the user, as indicated at step 333. The customer is now presented with the requested routing plan view via the TFNM client application.

A user may view a routing plan in several formats, e.g., a hierarchical tree graphic or a spreadsheet. In the preferred embodiment, as shown in the exemplar screen display 1660 of Figure 27(e), the Routing Plan is displayed as a tree structure comprising of a series of linked node types in a specific hierarchy. As shown

-151SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT7US98/20173 in Figure 27(e), the screen is divided into two main sections: a first section 1662 comprising the graphical representation of the routing tree having nodes tree branches that can be expanded and collapsed; and, a second section 1663 for displaying the details of the currently highlighted tree node. The node types that are available include: 1) a Plan node 1666a which is shown highlighted in Figure 27(e) and details the features for the plan; 2) an Origination node (ORIG) 1666b which details the geographical elements used in determining where to route the call. Multiple Origination nodes may exist under a plan node; 3) a Day of Week node (DOW) 1666c which details how to route calls based on days of the week. Multiple Day of Week nodes may exist under an Origination and all seven days of the week must be accounted for under each origination; 4) a Time of Day node (TOD) 1666d which details specific time ranges for routing calls. Multiple Time of Day nodes may exist under a Day of Week and all 24 hours of the day must be accounted for under each Day of Week; and, 5) a Percent Logical Termination node (%LTERM) 1666e which details where the calls terminate and at what percentage of the time. As shown in Figure 27(e), multiple %LTERM nodes may exist under a Time of Day. The percentages in sibling nodes must add up to 100 percent. A user can select details of any node by clicking or scrolling. Trigger Points (not shown) may also be displayed as children of the node they ride on. For example, a Trigger Point that rides on an Origination node would be displayed under the Origination on the same level as a Day-of-152SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

Week node. At each node, decisions related to the call routing are executed.

As further shown in Figure 27(e), for a plan node, the corresponding plan detail screen 1663 is populated with the existing plan description; the Orig id of the default orig on the plan; and Origination Features having values derived based on the features in use on the plan. Likewise, for an origination node 1666b, the corresponding plan detail screen displays: the ID of the highlighted origination node and the corresponding description including listboxes displaying the geographic elements (countries, states, area codes and exchanges) associated with the highlighted Origination node. For the DOW node 1666c, the corresponding plan detail screen displays the Day Id of the DOW node and the list of days associated with the DOW node. For the TOD node 1666d, the corresponding plan detail screen displays the list of time ranges associated with the TOD node. For the Termination node 1666e, the corresponding plan detail screen displays: the ID of the termination associated with the highlighted node; a description of the termination associated with the highlighted node; an indication of whether a cross corp term is associated with the highlighted node, and, if the Cross Corp Term indicator is Yes, a field displaying the cross corp Id associated with the termination in the Termination ID field; and an indication of the percentage of calls allocated to this termination node. Further details may be displayed including a Details tab (not shown) for displaying: the customer service id associated with the termination;

-153SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 the activation date of the termination; the activation date received associated with the termination; the service status associated with the termination; the Switch Trunk ID associated with the termination; and, an indication of whether the termination is EVS; whether the Termination has a real-time ANI Delivery and, the activation date for the Real Time ANI. Additionally, an ANI tab (not shown) may be displayed for presenting the user with information as to whether the termination has an Automatic Number Identifier (ANI), the country code associated with the termination and the Termination ANI. An Overflow tab of the termination details screen displays for the user: a network call redirect indicator indicating whether the termination has an NCR; a direct termination overflow indicator indicating whether the termination has a DTO. Likewise, a DNIS tab (not shown) may be displayed for presenting the user with information as to whether DNIS/Enhanced DNIS is active on the termination; the date that DNIS is activated; an indication of whether the Dialed Digit Outpulsing (DDO) is active on the termination; the prefix digits used for DNIS, and the number of digits to be reused for DNIS. Finally, an International Outbound tab (not shown) may be displayed for presenting the user with information as to whether international outbound is active on the termination; the Country code associated with the termination if international outbound is active; the Carrier code associated with the termination if international outbound is active; and

-154SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT7US98/20173 the free phone number associated with the termination if international outbound is active.

Via the TFNM Client Application, the user is now able to invoke TFNM functions such as the IMPL depicted in Figure 26 as the IMPL request 822 which enables the user to quickly change the number routing plan that a working number or set of working numbers is routing to; or QUIK depicted in Figure 26 as the QUIK request 824 which enables the user to quickly add, change and/or delete one or more termination locations, and/or change the percentage allocation of two or more of these locations, for a currently implemented routing plan. In accordance with the present invention, additional directives may include: a temporary (TEMP) IMPL directive which is created in conjunction with an Impl by entering a roll-back date so that the routing plan will revert to its prior use status prior to creation of the Impl; and a TEMP QUIK directive which enables roll-back of the changes made by a QUIK order to what they were before the QUIK.

For the case when a user desires to implement the IMPL/TEMP IMPL plan, or the QUIK/TEMP QUIK, the user selects the Setup IMPL from the TFNM screen. Specifically, the TFNM Client application causes the instantiation of an Order Manager object which invokes methods capable of accessing all the information pertaining to orders for a given corp id, set, TFNM telephone number and plan. An order comprises two components: 1) an order administration record comprising data such as: order status, effective data time and order number, etc.; and, 2) order

-155SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 administration detail record which includes the detailed information pertaining to that order, e.g., changes to percent allocation or effective dates/times etc. for a plan, etc. The Order Manager object includes an ImplOrder sub-class which knows about IMPL orders, e.g., IMPL functionality, and invokes objects to obtain order records, pertaining to plans. As mentioned, an IMPL order allows a user to change which routing plan they want to be in use for a specific number or a set of numbers.

Figure 27(f) illustrates the IMPL dialog screen 1670 enabling the user to generate a TEMP IMPL/IMPL order for the desired Corp Id. Particularly, as shown in Figure 27(f), a number/set selection dialog box 1671 is displayed having radio buttons enabling selection of the desired 800/8xx Number, a set of numbers, a reserved number; or, an EVS Number for implementing an EVS plan. Selection of one of these will invoke a data controller object for retrieving information from a TFNM database causing a corresponding dialog to appear enabling user search for the desired 800/8xx Number, set, reserved number, or EVS Number for the desired Corp Id. After selecting the desired number or set, the user is prompted to select from dialog box 1672 the specific plan type that is to be IMPL'd for the number or set. As shown, the dialog box 1672 comprises radio buttons enabling user selection of the desired plan IDs including, but not limited to, a Number Level Plan (NLP) implemented for an 800/8xx Number or a set of numbers, a Super Routing Plan (SRP) implemented for an 800/8xx Number, a set of numbers, or

-156SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT7US98/20173 a reserved number; and, an EVS plan implemented for an EVS Number. It should be understood that if the user has privileges for only one Corp ID, the system will select only the plans associated with that Corp ID for the user. If the user has privileges for more than one Corp ID, the user is presented with a list of all Corp IDs and will select one Corp ID. Any subsequent actions the user takes within the application are applicable to that selected corporation.

After having selected the Corp, set, Routing Plan Number or Routing Plan ID, the user may set or modify the routing plan. In the preferred embodiment, the user can define the routing plan according to any of the above-described options: Origin, Country, State, NPA, NXX, Day of week, Time of day, and Termination. These options can be defined for each Corp ID, Set or number. In the preferred embodiment, the user is enabled to implement NLPs, SRPs, and SVSs and URPs for a selected toll free number or, implement NLPs and SRPs for a set of numbers that they want routed differently. Via IMPL request messaging, the user selects the desired routing plan for the number/set and the desired date and time when they want to start routing the number to the selected plan and forwards the request to the TFNM server via HTTPS messaging.

As shown in Figure 26, the customer's Send IMPL request 822 is communicated over the HTTPS connection as a request to invoke methods in the Order Manager class/sub-classes via CORMI. Once the plan has been submitted to the TFNM server via the send IMPL message 822, the TFNM server receives the new routing plan and

-157SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 verifies the user's security with NetCap. Once the user's security has been verified, the TFNM server submits the IMPL request to NetCap 290 via Registry messaging. Particularly, the Order Manager classes/sub-classes execute methods for translating the IMPL order in a form suitable for submission to NetCap.

Included in the Registry message calls that are transmitted from the TFNM server to NetCap for the IMPL/TEMP IMPL order and the corresponding NetCap responses is the message for submitting an IMPL order (NIMPL) to NetCap.

It should be understood that, in the case of a user implementing a TEMP IMPL request, the user follows the same procedure as for the IMPL order, e.g., selecting the desired routing plan for the number/set and Corp Id. However, as shown in Figure 27(f), the user is presented with a dialog 1673 for submitting the desired date and time when the user wants to start routing the number to the selected plan, and, a dialog 1674 for submitting the roll back date and time when they want the previous routing plan to be effective again. Thus, both an IMPL and TEMP IMPL message pair is sent to the TFNM server for processing as described herein.

After a TEMP IMPL and/or IMPL request has been transmitted to NetCap 290, it is stored for future implementation. In view of Figure 26, NetCap sends an acknowledgment via Registry messaging back to the TFNM server.

Included in the Registry message calls that are transmitted to the TFNM server from NetCap in response

458SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

<img file="CA2304543A1_D0014.tif" />

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 to the submitted IMPL order is the message indicating successful processing of the IMPL request (NSUCS) and the message indicating completion of the order in NetCap (UCOMP), The TFNM server passes this information on to the user via CORMI messaging over the HTTPS connection. If the user is still logged on, this acknowledgment appears as a pop-up message on their screen, as indicated via line 826 in Figure 26. If the user has logged off, TFNM retains the acknowledgment that the IMPL has been received and saved for the next user logon. Likewise, when an IMPL has been transmitted to NetCap and either implemented or terminated, NetCap sends a registry message back to the TFNM server which, in turn, passes this information back to the user via HTTPS connectivity.

The user of the TFNM system may instead desire to execute the QUIK feature that enables customers to quickly add, change and/or delete one or more termination locations (nodes), and/or change the percentage allocation of two or more of these locations, for a currently implemented routing plan, Figure 27(g) illustrates an exemplary web-page screen 1680 instantiated by the TFNM client application for the QUIL/TEMP QUIK order process which is presented to the user. As shown in Figure 27(g), there is provided a number of radio buttons which the user may select: 1) an 800/8xx number button 1682 which causes a dialog to be displayed for enabling the user to enter or select an 800/8xx number from a list of 800/8xx #'s (not shown) having an associated plan in use. Once the 800/δχχ # is entered, the system returns the

-159SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 corresponding NLP or SRP Plan in use; 2) an SRP button 1684 which causes a dialog to be displayed for enabling the user to enter or select an SRP Id from a list (not shown). Once entered, the system returns the SRP Routing Plan for the SRP Id; 3) an EVS button 1686 which causes a dialog to be displayed for enabling the user to enter or select an EVS number. Once entered, the system returns an EVS Plan In Use if available. In each dialog, a corresponding data controller object is invoked for retrieving information from a TFNM database causing a corresponding dialog to appear enabling user selection.

After selecting the desired plan, the user is required to key or select each of the following buttons: Origination Id/Description 1687, Day of Week Id/Desc. 1688, and Time Begin/Desc. 1689. Selection of the Origination Id/Description button 1687 causes a list of Origination Id and corresponding descriptions to be displayed. In this manner a user may scroll through the list and identify the branch comprising the terminations that are to be modified. Likewise, selection of the Day of Week Id/Desc. button 1688 causes a list of Day of Week node ids/descriptions to be displayed for the selected Origination Id node and through which the user may scroll through and select for modification. Similarly, selection of the Time Begin button 1689 causes a list of Time of Day node ids/descriptions to be displayed for the selected DOW and through which the user may scroll through and select for modification. Through use of the Order Manager classes/sub-classes the system auto-populates

-160SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 the Orig, DOW, TOD, and, once populated, the system displays in display field 1692 the Lterms for the TOD node which comprise the terminations and percent allocations. In the preferred embodiment, the user may change percentage allocations by overtyping the amount or using the spin box up/down arrows 1690 (increments of 1 percent). The user may additionally modify the percentages for the remaining termination(s) as long as the sum of the percentages for all the terminations attached to the selected Time interval node equals 100 percent. Action keys 1695a-1695d may additionally be enabled for user selection in accordance with enterprise business rules and/or user security. Specifically, key 1695a enables the submission of the QUIK/TEMP QUIK order to NetCap for approval (Issue key). Key 1695b allows the user to add a termination to the TOD node (including cross-corp terms that the customer has cross corp agreements with), or change the termination id, description, or percent allocated to the termination for this plan. Preferably, selection of key 1695b enables display of a web page having a Termination screen enabling these choices. Key 1695c enables the user to select the termination that the user wants replaced and presents the user with the Termination screen to select the term for change (Change Term key). The key 1695d enables the user to select the term they want to delete on the selected routing branch. In the preferred embodiment, the system defaults effective date/time to the current date/time, however, the user may enter a future rollback date/time up to 1 year in the data and time entry fields 1696a,b

-161SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 in Figure 27 (g). If the user enters a Rollback date/time in the rollback date fields, the system generates a TEMP QUIK order that sets the Routing Plan back to its state before the QUIK order. Preferably, the Rollback date/time may not be greater than 1 year in the future.

Thus, from the dialog box 1680 (Figure 27(g)), the user is enabled to perform the following: 1) change one or more terminations for NLP or SRP; 2) replace one or more terminations on an EVS Routing Plan; 3) change the percent allocation of currently implemented NLP, EVS, or SRP Plan; 4) add one or more terminations to the currently implemented NLP or SRP Plan; 5) add one or more terminations to an EVS Routing Plan; and, 6) delete one or more terminations from the currently implemented plan of an NLP, EVS or SRP Plans. It should be understood that, in the case of a user implementing a TEMP QUIK request, the user selects the desired routing plan for the number/set, the desired date and time when they want to add, change and/or delete one or more termination locations and/or percentage allocation of these locations for a currently implemented routing plan, and, optionally, the roll back date and time when the changes are to revert back to their original settings. Thus, a QUIK and TEMP QUIK message pair is sent to the TFNM server for processing as described herein.

Referring back to Figure 26, the customer's Send QUIK request 824 is communicated by the TFNM client applet by communication between the Dispatcher server 235 and the TFNM server objects using CORMI. The

-162SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

Object manager/sub-classes execute methods for translating the QUIK/TEMP QUIK order in a form suitable for submission to NetCap.

Included in the Registry message calls that are transmitted from the TFNM server to NetCap for the QUIK/TEMP QUIK order and the corresponding NetCap responses is the message for submitting an QUIK order (NQUIK) to NetCap.

Once the plan has been submitted to the TFNM server via the send QUIK message, the TFNM server receives the new routing plan and verifies the user's security with NetCap. Once the user's security has been verified, the TFNM server submits the QUIK request to NetCap 290 via Registry messaging.

After a TEMP QUIK and/or QUIK request has been transmitted to NetCap, it is stored for future implementation. In view of Figure 26, NetCap sends a registry message to the TFNM server acknowledging that the request has been stored.

Included in the Registry message calls that are transmitted to the TFNM server from NetCap in response to the submitted QUIK order is the message indicating successful processing of the QUIK request (NSUCS) and the message indicating completion of the order in NetCap (UCOMP). The TFNM server then passes this information on to the user via CORMI messaging over the HTTPS connection. If the user is still logged on, this acknowledgment appears as a pop-up message on their screen, as indicated via line 826 in Figure 26. If the user has logged off, TFNM retains the acknowledgment that the QUIK order has been received and saved for the

-163SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 next user logon. Likewise, when a QUIK has been transmitted to NetCap and either implemented or terminated, NetCap sends a registry message back to the TFNM server which, in turn, passes this information back to the user via HTTPS connectivity.

As described, a change to a routing plan is saved locally before being submitted to NetCap. The submission happens when the plan changes are converted into an approved order having an approved order admin record and with a condition that NetCap has no preceding orders queued against the plan. The submission process takes place in two steps: first, the order admin record is sent to NetCap immediately, and second, when no orders are pending against the plan, the order admin detail record is then sent. The delay results because NetCap does not queue more than one order against a plan at a time. The TFNM server is configured to hide this limitation by stacking orders a process of accepting multiple submissions and queuing them internally for later transmission to NetCap. The order admin record is sent immediately. The order admin detail record is sent soon as possible thereafter.

Further functionality provided by the TFNM server is the ability to open plans, i.e., display a list of routing plans under the current working environment for display as a VORT (Figure 27(e)), or, view orders and filter through orders. Particularly, the TFNM client will instantiate the Order Manager object which instantiates order administration detail objects and other objects for retrieving administrative records

-164SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 comprising the details for a particular order in the TFNM database. For example, selection of the Report Order menu option shown in the screen display of Figure 27(c), will cause the display of an order filter screen enabling a user to enter elements that they would like to use to query for orders and submit order queries. The results of an order query are displayed in an order select list 1696, such as shown in Figure 27(h). From this list, a user can retrieve details pertaining to an order, or, change an order's status or update remarks. Particularly, from an administration button 1699, the user is presented with a dialog 1700 as shown in Figure 27 (i), for example, enabling the user to update the order status and the effective date/time. It is from these dialogs that a user may select a button 1703 to un-approve an order (if the selected order has been approved by NetCap) and, a button 1704 to zap (delete) an existing order.

Registry message calls are also transmitted from the TFNM server to NetCap for un-approving an order (NOUAP), zapping an order (NOZAP), and, requesting pending order data (NPIUOÎ.

It should be understood that, in accordance with the principles described herein, the TFNM management tool of the invention is capable of supporting feature orders, i.e., functionality enabling customers to add a new TFN routing plan, e.g., NLP, SRP, URP, or EVS, or, change other the attributes or structure of an existing plan, e.g., changing attributes of a routing plan directly from the VORT (Figure 24(b)). The TFNM tool additionally may provide

-165SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 drag and drop enabling users to configure routing elements between plans.

Although the TFNM web/Internet network management tool has been described herein with respect to a customer's toll-free, e.g., 1-800/8xx networks, the principles may be readily applied to other types of telecommunications network numbers.

ONM

Another application of the suite of telecommunications network applications is the networkMCI Interact Outbound Network Manager application 2700. Referred to herein as ONM, the outbound network management tool 2700 provides the client GUI and middle-tier service that enable customers to manage and track Calling Party Number Orders, Calling Card Orders, Dialing Plan Orders, and ID Code Set Orders relating to their private networks such as Vnet and Vision networks.

As shown in Figure 28, the ONM tool 2700 of the invention implements an ONM domain server 2750 integrated with a back-end MCI intranet and legacy system infrastructure comprising above-described MCI's NetCap order entry system 290, Service Control Manager 290a (SCM) and Data Access Points 290b (DAP). The ONM server 2750 enables customers to change their Vnet/Vision network management plans, both in real-time and on a scheduled basis, via nMCI Interact's web-based front-end and middle-tier infrastructure.

-166SUBSTTTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

Particularly, customer order directives are entered by the customer 20 via an ONM graphic user interface. These directives are preferably communicated as Java applets over secure HTTPS socket connections 2722, 2724 for input over the firewall 25(a) to at least one secure server, e.g., a DMZ Web server 24 that provides for authentication, validation, and session management in the manner as herein described. After validation and authentication, the DMZ Web server 24, in turn, reencrypts messages and dispatches them to the Dispatcher 26 server over TCP/IP connection 2734. The Dispatcher server may implement an ONM proxy 2735 which properly receives ONM order messages from the web server, and translates them into a format suitable for transmission over another TCP/IP connection 2736 to the ONM domain server 2750. As will be described, the ONM domain server 2750 interfaces with the NetCap 290 mainframe system that provides user interface to the network control system, i.e., DAP switches 290b (Figure 6). The ONM domain server 2750 may include Java object classes whose methods are invoked by Java applets running on the customer browser. The browser Java applets specifically execute the customer directives by invoking certain methods on the ONM Domain server 2750. These Java objects additionally provide the interface functions to the NetCap 290. In the preferred embodiment, the Java objects at the ONM domain server function as the ONM proxy, and are invoked remotely

-167SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 implementing a Java remote method invocation RMI-like methodology.

Particularly, as described herein with respect to Figure 2, within the networkMCI Interact framework for producing Java applications over the Internet, there is provided common objects and an infrastructure allowing secure communications between a client (which resides on a browser) and a server (which resides safely within MCI's firewalls). As described, the security strategy includes: encrypting communication from the client to the web-server via SSL (HTTPS) and implementing HTTPS as the preferred method for allowing communication into the web server from the Internet; providing an additional firewall between the web-server and the dispatcher to allow only specific traffic from the web server to the dispatcher to occur? encrypting traffic between the web server and the dispatcher via DSA encryption; and enabling the dispatcher to validate all packets destined to internal MCI servers to ensure that they are from an authenticated client, and that a particular client has permission to communicate with a specific back-end server. To make this seamless for the client, the set of Common Objects performs this messaging. In the preferred embodiment, a CORMI (Common Objects RMI) which provides an RMI-like interface between the client and the server using the networkMCI Interact protocol is implemented. The CORMI procedures implemented have additional controls built

-168SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 in to provide the necessary session security and maintenance for communication over the firewalls.

After customer logon, authentication and entitlement determination, a networkMCI Interact applet is downloaded to the customers Web Browser via the established TCP/IP connection, and the browser presents the customer with the networkMCI Interact systems home page including a Network Manager icon 89 (Fig. 5(a)) . Selection of this icon, enables a client ONM application to be downloaded to the customer who is then presented with the ONM screen, as indicated at step 318.

An exemplary ONM web-page display 2764 is shown in Figure 29(a) which presents a variety of ONM menu options including: 1) a File menu option 2702 providing a selection 2704 for creating a new order, a selection 2706 for opening an existing order, a selection 2708 for displaying events, and a selection 2710 for enabling 3270 cut through to a Vnet/Vision configuration management system; 2) an Edit menu 2715 providing options for deleting an ONM order or, enabling a search for specific components, e.g., within an Order detail and Inventory windows pertaining to a Calling Party Number (CPN), Calling card, Dialing Plan, and ID Code/Set, such as will be described? 3) a Control menu 2720 providing a refresh option to enable a user to retrieve a list of all updated lists that have been altered on the host system including: Network IDs, Range Privileges, ID Code Set, Billing location

469SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

ID, Customer Service ID, Location/Access type and Provisioning Carrier; and 4) a Report menu 2723 providing options enabling a customer to inquire on his/her inventory of CPNs, Calling Cards, Dialing Plans and ID Code Sets.

With more particularity regarding the File menu option 2702, when a user selects the new order menu option 2704, he/she is presented with a drop down menu (not shown) presenting a section of the order types which can be created via their Web Browser, e.g., CPN, Calling Card, Dialing Plan, and ID Code Set. When the user selects the open order selection 2706 from the drop down menu of Figure 29(a), the user is presented with a web page 2725 displaying a request order window where the user may enter search criteria from which a user may select orders, or, choose all orders. As shown in Figure 29(b), the user may enter the following search criteria: an exact order number or partial order number in the order match field 2730; an order type, e.g., Calling Card, CPN, Dialing Plan, ID Code Set, or all, from a drop down list presented by order type drop down menu 2732; a starting date or current default date in the starting date field 2737; a user ID or default current user ID from the user ID field 2739; and, a set of order status check boxes 2740 which enables the user to choose an order status, e.g., not approved, approved, complete, and error/rejected.

When multiple orders are retrieved, as a result of an entered search criteria, a web page 2744 presenting

-170SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 an Orders window will appear such as shown in Figure 29(c). From the Order detail window, an order may be selected, e.g., by double clicking an order summary line 2743. The field descriptions for an order displayed in the orders window include: an order Number 2745 which is a unique number assigned to the order for identification; a currently logged-on user ID 2746; the current order status 2747; the order type 2748, e.g., ID Code, as depicted in Figure 29(c); the date the order was prepared 2751, and the effective date/time 2752 when the order will be implemented in the network by the host. The details of an order may be retrieved by highlighting the order summary line 2743 and pressing the details button 275453 or, by doubleclicking the order summary line 2743. It should be understood that the user may retrieve a web page having an Order window by either selection of a New Order, from Figure 29(a), or, selection from the Open Orders Window, when retrieving existing order(s).

Selection of a new or existing CPN Order option via the nMCI Interact ONM system allows a customer to ’’link or attach network features to any Calling Party Number (CPN) that exists in that customer's inventory,

i.e., CPNs that are active in that customer's database. Preferably, the following features can be defined/linked to CPNs: 1) Multiple Networks; 2) Supplemental Codes including ID Codes and Accounting Codes; 3) Range Privileges including Universal and

-171SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

Customized; 4) Data vs. Voice Specification; and Extended Enterprise (Location/Access Type).

Figure 29(d) illustrates a web page 2755 comprising a CPN order window comprising the following sections: an order administration section 2760 for handling administrative aspects of the CPN order; a CPN inventory section 2770 used to retrieve CPNs from inventory that are not included on another order. This is accomplished by selection of the retrieve button 2775 and enables display of, inter alia, the CPNs and associated PINs, a description assigned to the CPN, and a component count; a CPN updates section 480 which populates the CPN order window by moving selected calling cards from the cards in inventory section or by adding new calling cards to the current order; and, an attributes section 2790 for populating an area of the web page screen display 2755 with a list of attributes, or features, for a selected CPN in the inventory or updates section.

With more particularity, the CPN order administration section 2760 of web page display 2755 comprises the following field descriptions: 1) a field 2762 enabling a customer to set the date/time when the order is to be implemented by the host. For example, a default time is the current PC date and time, shown in the format of MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM (24 hour clock); 2) a field 2764 enabling the establishment of a priority (depending on security access privileges); 3) a field 2766 for describing the order's current status. For

-172SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 example, new CPN orders default to not approved; 4) a Remarks text field 2767 optionally used to describe the contents of the CPN order; and, 5) an Approve field 2768 such that when checked, indicates the order is approved and transmitted to the host. After transmission, the field name changes to Approved and the Order Status field displays Approved. It should be understood that, if authorized, a customer may unapprove an approved order that has not completed by reselecting the Approved check box. A pop-up message (not shown) in the web display will prompt the customer to confirm the action.

With more particularity, the CPN inventory section 2770 used to retrieve CPNs from CPN order inventory comprises the following field/command button descriptions: a CTRY field 2772 including a three-digit country code for the CPN; a CPN Beginning field 2774 comprising the remaining digits of the CPN or the beginning number within a range; a Description field 2776 comprising an alphanumeric description assigned to the CPN, e.g., the CPN location or company name; a Component Count field 2778 indicating how many CPNs are within the CPNs in Inventory section; a Retrieve button 2775 such that, when selected, retrieves a list of a customer's available CPNs in inventory that are not included in other orders. Selection of this option will enable a web page display of a Retrieve CPNs from Inventory Window 2812 such as shown in Figure 29(f); and, a right arrow > command button 2779 enabling a

-173SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 customer to move single or multiple (selected) CPNs from the CPNs in inventory section to the CPN Updates to include in the current order.

With more particularity, the CPN updates section 2780 comprises the following f ield/command button descriptions: a status code indication field 2781 displayed next to a CPN, with the following designations: a (blank) indication meaning no status; an A indicating that a new CPN is being added, e.g., Stentor customers; a C displayed next to CPNs that have been changed; and a D indicating that a CPN has been marked for deletion; a CTRY field 2782; a CPN Beginning field 2783; a Description field 2784; and, a Component Count field 2787 as described above; a left arrow &lt; command button 2788 enabling a customer to remove a CPN from the current order, and to restore its attributes back to those that were last transmitted to the host, i.e., move one or more highlighted CPNs to the CPNs in Inventory section; an Add command button 2785, e.g., displayed for Stentor customers, which presents a web page having an Add New CPN window such as shown in Figure 29(c); and, a Delete command button 2786, e.g., displayed for Stentor customers marks the highlighted CPN displayed in the CPN Updates section for deletion.

With more particularity, the CPN attributes section 2790 comprises the following field/command button descriptions: an Item field 2792 comprising those Vnet/Vision feature items that are listed in this

-174SUBSTTTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 column once linked to CPN(s), e.g., Range Privilege, ID Code Set, etc.; a Value field 2793 which comprises the defined value of the network features (e.g., U 001) linked to CPN(s); a CPN Nbr field 2794 which designates the information displayed in the Attributes section is for the selected CPN, which can be either in the CPNs In Inventory or CPN Updates sections; a Variable field 2795 which changes according to the item selected in the Attributes section and enables customers to add/change information for the selected item, except when any prepopulated information is dimmed; a <Set Dflt> button 2796 which enables a customer to define the PC default for CPN attributes. Once set, the PC default values can be applied to other CPNs by selecting the <Use Dflt> button 2797 which command provides the option of applying either the host default or the user-defined PC default attributes for the selected CPN. For example, if the Location Type of the current CPN is C, default attributes that would change it to A or B cannot be applied. On the other hand, if Location Type C was established as a default with <Set Dflt>, a pop-up message will prompt the user to confirm using it as a default when you select <Use Dflt>; an <Undo> button 2798 for removing any changes made to the selected CPN, and restoring its attributes back to those that were last transmitted to the host, an <Expand> button 2799 enabling the display of the Calling Party Number Attributes window, such as

-175SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 shown in Figure 29(g); and a <Close> button 2791 for closing the CPN Order window.

The Add New CPN window 2800 such as shown in Figure 29(e) enables a customer, if authorized, to add a new CPN to their inventory and assign it attributes. In the example web page display shown in Figure 29(e), the Add new CPN functionality includes: assigning a provisioning carrier in entry field 2802; adding a CPNFrom number in entry field 2804; adding a CPN-Το number in entry field 2806; and, adding a CPN description in entry field 2808. Preferably, the added CPN(s) are displayed in the CPN Updates section 2780 with the A indication 2781 as shown in Figure 29(d). It should be understood that CPN orders may be deleted by selecting the delete button 2786 (Figure 29(d)).

As mentioned above, selection of the CPN Retrieve button 2775 enables a web page display of a Retrieve CPNs from Inventory Window 2812 such as shown in the example web page display of Figure 29(f). From this window, a customer may specify search criteria or retrieve a predetermined amount of CPNs having defaulted criteria. Particularly, the Retrieve CPNs from Inventory window 2812 comprises the following field/command button descriptions for retrieving CPNs from customer inventory: a country field 2814 for a country code from a drop-down list by selecting a down arrow 2815 when specifying a CPN in the CPN From field; a CPN From field 2816 enabling a customer to enter a partial or whole CPN, e.g., from 3-25 numeric

-176SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 characters. The nMCI Interact ONM system matches the partial CPN and retrieves the first 10 exchanges available in inventory; a Quantity field 2817 enabling a customer to enter a value, from 1 to 200 per CPN group, specifying the quantity of CPNs to include in the retrieval; a Network ID field 2818 enabling a customer to select a specific Network ID from the dropdown list by selecting the down arrow; a Range Privilege field 2819 enabling a customer to select a specific Range Privilege from the drop-down list by selecting the down arrow; an ID Code Set field 2820 enabling a customer to select a specific ID Code Set number from the drop-down list by selecting the down arrow. It should be understood that ID Code Sets must be defined prior to creating the CPN Order, as will be described herein; a Description field 2821 enabling a customer to type a full or partial CPN description as retrieval criteria; an <Add> button 2823 for updating the list box with the group information from the

Country, CPN From, Quantity, Network ID, Range

Privilege, ID Code Set and Description edit boxes; a <Remove> button 2825 enabling a customer to remove a highlighted display item so that it is not included in the retrieval request; an <0K> button 2826 for accepting all entries in the Retrieve CPNs from Inventory window, and messaging the host. If nMCI

Interact ONM finds one or more CPNS that matches specified search criteria, it will close the Retrieve CPNs from Inventory window. If the Retrieve CPNs from

-177SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

Inventory window is accessed from the CPN Order window, the results are displayed in the CPNs in Inventory section and replaces any CPNs that may have been in this section prior to retrieval; and, a <Cancel> button 2827 for closing the Retrieve CPNs from Inventory window without accepting any changes.

As mentioned above, selection of the CPN attributes <Sxpand> button 2799 (Fig. 29(d)) enables a web page display of a Calling Party Number Attributes window 2830, such as shown in the example web page display of Figure 29(g). From this window, a customer may view only CPN attributes or features, if the selected CPN is located in the CPNs in Inventory section of the CPN order window, or, view or modify attributes if the selected CPN is in the CPN Updates section.

As shown in the example web page display of Figure 29(g), a first section referred to as the CPN information section 2840 comprises view only fields presenting information such as: a three digit country code field 2841 which identifies the country of origin foç this CPN; a From field 542 indicating the beginning number of a possible range of CPNs affected by this CPN Order; a To field 2843 indicating the last number of a range of numbers affected by this CPN Order; a Customer Account field 2844; a Division ID field 2845; a Description field 2846 describing the CPN(s); and, a yes or no Cellular field 2847 indicating whether this CPN originates from a cellular phone.

-178SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

Additionally, a second section referred to as the CPN feature information section 2850 comprises the following field/command buttons including: a Network ID field 552 obtained from the drop-down list by selecting the down arrow; a Range Privilege field 2853 for selecting the Range Privilege (customized or universal) to be linked to this Calling Card from the drop-down list by selecting the down arrow; an ID Code Set field 2854 for selecting an ID Code Set to be associated with this CPN from the drop-down list by selecting the down arrow. When an ID Code Set is chosen, nMCI Interact ΟΝΜ automatically populates the ID Code Length; a Supp Code Collection field 2855 enabling selection from the drop down list to indicate when ID and/or accounting codes will be collected for this CPN. A tone will prompt callers to enter code(s) after the dialed number. Selections include: 0 - Do not collect Supplemental Codes; 1 - Collect Supplemental Codes for all numbers; 2 - Collect Supplemental Codes on all calls except 7-digit Private On-Net Numbers; 3 Collect Supplemental Codes only for international OffNet numbers; 4 - Collect Supplemental Codes for all Off-Net numbers; a Data Indicator field 2856 enabling a user to denote data versus voice traffic by selecting from the drop-down list; a Prov Carrier 2857 indicating the provisioning carrier (MCI or Stentor) associated with the CPN, in the format of Country Code, padded to three digits with leading zeros, and the 4-digit Carrier Code; a Location Type field 2858 which may be

-179SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 selected by clicking on the down arrow to activate the drop down list; an ID Code Length field 2859 which is autopopulated with a 2-digit number according to the ID Code Set selected; an Account Code Length field 2860; and, <Set Default:*, <use Default:*, <OK> and <Cancel> option buttons, as described herein.

When opening an existing Calling card order, the nMCI Interact ONM system Calling Card Order option allows a customer to ”link or attach network features to a Calling Card(s) that exist in that customer's inventory, i.e., Calling Cards that are active in that customer's database, or link network features to a new calling card. The following features can be defined/linked to Calling Cards: 1) Multiple Networks; 2) Range Privileges including Universal and Customized; Range Restrictions including Corporate and Custom; and Extended Enterprise (Location/Access Type).

Figure 29(h) illustrates an example web page 2870 comprising a Calling Card order window comprising the following sections: 1) an order administration section 2880 for providing administrative aspects of the Calling Card order such as: enabling entry of a date/time when the order is to be implemented by the host; selecting a priority based on the user's security access privilege; establishing an order status, e.g., approved or not approved for new orders in accordance with a users authorization; 2) a Cards in Inventory Section 2890 used to retrieve Calling Cards from inventory that are not included on another order. This

-180SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 is accomplished by selection of the retrieve button 2895 and enables display of, inter alia, the Calling card numbers and associated PINs, a description assigned to the calling card, and a component count; 3) a Card updates section 2900 which populates the calling card order window by moving selected calling cards from the cards in inventory section or by adding new calling cards to the current order; and, 4) an attributes section 2910 for populating an area 2912 of the screen display with a list of attributes, or features, for a selected calling card in the inventory or updates section.

With more particularity, the Calling Card order administration section 2880 of web page display 2870 comprises the same field descriptions as mentioned herein with respect to the CPN order administration including: 1) a set date/time field 2882 for when the calling card order is to be implemented by the host; 2) a priority field 2884 for establishing calling card order priority (depending on security access privileges); 3) a current order status field 2886; 4} a Remarks text field 2889 optionally used to describe the contents of the Calling card order; and, 5) an Approve field 2888 such that when checked, indicates the order is approved and transmitted to the host.

The Calling Card inventory section 2890 used to retrieve a Calling Card(s) from the Calling Card inventory comprises the following field/command button descriptions: a Card Nbr-PIN field 2892 that displays

-181SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 the Calling Card number and associated PIN if the user has security access to view the PINS; a Description field 2894 which comprises a description assigned to the Calling Card, e.g., the employee or company name; a Component Count field 2896 indicating how many Calling Cards are within the Calling Cards Inventory section; a Retrieve button 2895 such that, when selected, retrieves a list of a customer's available Calling cards in inventory that are not included in other orders. Selection of this option enables a web page display of a Retrieve Calling Cards from Inventory Window 2920 such as shown in Figure 29 (i); and, a right arrow > command button 2 898 enabling a customer to move single or multiple (selected) Calling Cards from the Calling Cards in inventory section to the Calling card Updates to include on the current order.

The Calling card updates section 2900 comprises the same field/command button descriptions as mentioned herein with respect to the CPN order administration including: a status code indication 2901 displayed next to a Calling card having the same designations, i.e., no status, A, C, and D; a Card Nbr-PIN field 2902, a Description field 2903 and, a Component Count field 2904 as described above; a left arrow &lt; command button 2905 enabling a customer to remove a Calling card from the current order, and to restore its attributes back to those that were last transmitted to the host, i.e., move one or more highlighted Calling cards to the Calling cards in Inventory section; an

-182SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

Add command button, e.g., only displayed for stentor customers; and, a Delete command button.

The Calling Card attributes section 2910 comprises the same field/command button descriptions as mentioned herein with respect to the CPN order administration including: a table 2912 including an item field 2911 comprising those Vnet/Vision feature items that are listed in this column once linked to Calling cards, e.g., Range Privilege, Location type, etc.; a Value field 2913; a Card Nbr field 2914 which designates the information displayed in the Attributes section is for the selected Calling card, which can be either in the Calling card In Inventory or Calling cards Updates sections; a <Set Dflt> button 2915 which enables a customer to define the PC default for Calling card attributes. Once set, the PC default values can be applied to other Calling cards by selecting the <Use Dflt> button 2916 which command provides the option of applying either the host default or the user-defined PC default attributes for the selected Calling card; an <Undo> button 2917; an <Expand> button 2918 enabling the display of the Calling Card Attributes window, such as shown in Figure 29 (j); and a <Close> button 2919 for closing the Calling card Order window.

As mentioned above, selection of the Calling card Retrieve button 2895 in Figure 29(h) enables a web page display of a Retrieve Calling cards from Inventory Window 2920 such as shown in the example web page of Figure 29 (i). From this web page, a customer may

-183SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 specify search criteria or retrieve a predetermined amount of Calling cards having defaulted criteria. Particularly, the Retrieve Calling cards from Inventory Window 2920 comprises the following field/command button descriptions for retrieving Calling cards from customer inventory: a Card Nbr field 2921 enabling entry of a partial or whole 10-digit calling card number; a PIN field 2922 enabling entry of an optional 4-digit personal identification number that is associated with the Calling Card number and can only be used in combination with Card Nbr; a Quantity field 2923 enabling a customer to enter a value, from 1 to 200 per Calling card group, specifying the quantity of Calling cards to include in the retrieval; a Network ID field 2924; a Range Privilege field 2925 enabling a customer to select a specific Range Privilege from the drop-down list by selecting the down arrow; a Description field 2926 enabling a customer to type a full or partial Calling card description as retrieval criteria; an <Add> button 2927 for updating the list box with the group information from the Card Nbr, PIN, Quantity Network ID, Range Privilege, and Description edit boxes; a <Remove> button 2928 enabling a customer to remove a highlighted display item so that it is not included in the retrieval request; an <OK> button 2929 for accepting all entries in the Retrieve Calling cards from Inventory window, and messaging the host; and, a <Cancel> button 2930 for closing the Retrieve Calling

-184SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 cards from Inventory window without accepting any changes.

As mentioned above, selection of the Calling card <Expand> button 2918 (Fig. 29(h)) from the calling card attributes section enables a web page display of a Calling card Attributes window 2940, such as shown in Figure 29 (j). From this window, a customer may view only calling card attributes or features, if the selected calling card is located in the Cards in inventory section of the calling card order window, or, view or modify attributes if the selected calling card is in the Card Updates section. As shown in the web page display of Figure 29 (j), a first section referred to as the calling card information section 2935 comprises view only fields presenting information such as: the Calling Card Number 2936 and the associated PIN 2937; the Customer Account number 2938; and the calling card description 2939 which is user-defined and accessible. Additionally, a second section referred to as the feature information section 2941 comprises the following field/command buttons including: a Network ID field 2942 obtained from the drop-down list by selecting the down arrow; a Range Privilege field 2943 for selecting the Range Privilege (customized or universal) to be linked to the Calling Card from the drop-down list by selecting the down arrow; a Range Restriction field 2944 for selecting a Corporate or Custom Range Restriction to be linked to this Called Card from the drop-down list by selecting the down

-185SUBSTTTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 arrow; a Prov Carrier field 2946 which indicates the provisioning carrier (MCI or Stentor) associated with the Calling Card, in the format of Country Code, padded to three digits with leading zeros, and the 4-digit Carrier Code; a Location Type field 2948 for example, host default, which, once selected, cannot be changed until the Calling Card is deactivated and reinstalled; a <Set Default> button; an <Use Default> button; an <OK> command button for returning to the Calling Card Order window; and a <Cancel> button for exiting the Calling Card Attributes window without making changes to the feature information.

In a similar manner as described above with respect to the Add New CPN web page display (Figure 29(e)), a Stentor customer, if authorized, may add a new Calling Card to their inventory and assign attributes. The Add new Calling Card functionality includes: assigning a card number and associated personal identification number (PIN), adding a provisioning carrier in the format of a country code, and, adding a Calling card description. It should be understood that Calling card orders may be deleted by selecting a delete button.

When opening an existing Dialing Plan order or creating a new one, the nMCI Interact ONM system Dialing Plan Order option allows a company to define their call routing Dialing Plans to meet their business needs and manage their network costs. Thus, the nMCI Interact Outbound NM Dialing Plan order enables a

-186SUBSTÎTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

<img file="CA2304543A1_D0015.tif" />

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 customer to: 1) Create 7-digit Private Numbers that translate to Public Numbers, used for caller convenience and easy association of locations; 2) Force Public Numbers On-Net so that it is no longer routed according to Public Network rules, but rather by the customer's dialing plan; 3) Exclude a specific number, or range of Public Numbers, to control network abuse; assign specific numbers to terminate to Customized Message Announcements to provide user-defined information lines; and, establish Hotlines to enhance customer service by providing caller convenience and local presence.

Within a dialing plan order, a user may specify the origination, or dialed digit range (the number dialed), and the termination data (where or how the call is answered, e.g., terminating to Dedicated Access Lines (DALs).

Figure 29 (k) illustrates an example web page comprising a Dialing Plan order window 2950 comprising the following sections: 1) an order administration section 2960 for providing administrative aspects of the Dialing Plan order such as: enabling entry of a date/time when the order is to be implemented by the host; selecting a priority based on the user's security access privilege; establishing an order status, e.g., approved or not approved for new orders in accordance with a users authorization; 2) a Dialing Plans in inventory section 2970 used to retrieve Dialing Plans from inventory that are not included on another order.

-187SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

This is accomplished by selection of the retrieve button 2975 and enables display of the country codes associated with the Dialing Plan; display of the dial plan single number or beginning number within a range; a termination type for the dialing plan; and, a component count indicating the amount of dialing plans that are in the inventory section; 3) a Dialing Plan updates section 2980 for populating the dialing plan order window by moving selected dialing plans from the Dialing Plan inventory section or by adding new dialing plans to the current order; and, 4) an attributes section 2990 for populating an area of screen display 2950 with a list of attributes, or features, for a selected dialing plan in the inventory or updates section.

With more particularity, the Dialing Plan order administration section 2960 of example web page display 2950 comprises the same field descriptions as mentioned herein with respect to the CPN order administration including: 1) a set date/time field 2961 for when the dialing plan order is to be implemented by the host; 2) a priority field 2962 for establishing dialing plan order priority (depending on security access privileges); 3) a current order status field 2963; 4) a Remarks text field 2964 optionally used to describe the contents of the Dialing Plan order; and, 5) an Approve field 2965 such that when checked, indicates the order is approved and transmitted to the host.

-188SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

The Dialing Plans in Inventory section 2970 used to retrieve Dialing Plan(s) from the Dialing Plan inventory comprises the following field/command button descriptions: a Ctry field 2971 that displays the Dialing Plan's country code; a Dial Plan Beginning field 2972 indicating the remaining digits of the Dialing Plan number of beginning number within a range; a type field 2973 indicating the termination type for the dialing plan; a Component Count field 2974 indicating how many Dialing Plans are within the Calling Cards Inventory section; a Retrieve button 2975 such that, when selected, retrieves a list of a customer's available Dialing Plans in inventory that are not included in other orders. Selection of this option will enable a web page display having a Retrieve Dialing Plans from Inventory Window 3000 such as shown in Figure 29(1); and, a right arrow > command button 676 enabling a customer to move single or multiple (selected) Dialing Plans from the Dialing Plans in inventory section to the Dialing Plan Updates to include on the current order.

The Dialing Plan updates section 2980 comprises the same field/command button descriptions as mentioned herein with respect to the CPN updates section including: a status code indication 2981 displayed next to a Dialing Plan having the same designations, i.e., no status, A (added), C (changed), and D (deleted); a Ctry field 2982, a Dial Plan Beginning field 2983, a termination type field 2984, and, a

-189SUBSTTTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

Component Count field 2985 as described above; a left arrow &lt; command button 2986 enabling a customer to remove a Dialing Plan from the current order, and to restore its attributes back to those that were last transmitted to the host, i.e., move one or more highlighted Dialing Plans to the Dialing Plans in Inventory section; an Add command button enabling entry of new Dialing Plan record(s); and, a Delete command button for deleting Dialing Plan records.

The Dialing Plan attributes section 2990 comprises the same field/command button descriptions as mentioned herein with respect to the CPN attributes section including: an Item field 2992, e.g., Network ID; a Value field 2994; a Dial Nbr field 2996 which designates the information displayed in the Attributes section is for the selected Dialing Plan, which can be either in the Dialing Plans In Inventory or Dialing Plan Updates sections; an <Undo> button 2997; an <Expand> button 2998 enabling the display of the Dialing Plan Attributes window, such as shown in Figure 29(m); and a <Close> button 2999 for closing the Dialing Plan Order window.

As mentioned above, selection of the Dialing Plan Retrieve button 2975 in Figure 29(k) enables a web page display of a Retrieve Dialing Plans from Inventory Window 3000 such as shown in the example web page of Figure 29(1) . From this display, a customer may specify search criteria or retrieve a predetermined amount of Dialing Plans having defaulted criteria.

-190SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

Particularly, the Retrieve Dialing Plans from Inventory Window 3000 comprises the following field/command button descriptions for retrieving Dialing Plans from customer inventory: an International Direct Dialed Digits IDDD radio button 3001 enabling entry of dialed digits as a public number in a dialed digits field 3003. When IDDD is selected, the user is required to designate a Country Code in a Country field 3002; a Private radio button 3005 enabling entry of a Private Number in the Dialed Digits field when selected. The Country field is protected when this type of dialed digits is selected; a Country field 3002 that must be selected from the drop-down list when IDDD is selected as the type of dialed digits; a dialed digits field 3003 enabling entry of a partial or whole number (dialed digits) not including the Country Code); a Quantity field 3004 enabling a customer to enter a value, from 1 to 100, specifying the quantity of Dialing Plans to include in the retrieval; a Network ID field 3006; a Termination/Location ID field 3008 indicating the Location ID of a DAL which can be selected from the drop-down list (if available within the customer's network); an <Add> button for updating the list box in the selected dialing plans section with the group information from the IDDD, Private, Country (only when IDDD is selected), Dialed Digits, Quantity, Network ID and Termination Location ID edit boxes, where applicable; a <Remove> button enabling a customer to remove a highlighted display item so that it is not

-191SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 included in the retrieval request; an <OK> button for accepting all entries in the Retrieve Dialing Plans from Inventory window, and messaging the host; and, a <Cancel> button for closing the Retrieve Dialing Plans from Inventory window without accepting any changes.

As mentioned above, selection of the Dialing Plan <Expand> button 2998 from the Dialing Plan attributes section enables a web page display of a Dialing Plan Attributes window 3020, such as the example web page display shown in Figure 29 (m) . From this display, a customer may view Dialing plan attributes or features, if the selected dialing plan is located in the Dialing Plans in Inventory section of the Dialing Plans Order window, or, view or modify attributes if the selected calling card is in the Dialing Plan Updates section.

As shown in the web page display of Figure 29 (m) , a first section referred to as the Dialed Digit Range section 3022 comprises fields/command buttons enabling a customer to define the origination data (number dialed) for a dialing plan. The field/command buttons include: type radio buttons 3025 enabling the selection of the originating number as a private number or public number (IDDD); a country field 3026 for enabling entry of a country code from a drop-down list when IDDD is selected as the dialed digit type; a network ID field 3027 enabling entry of a network in which a new Dialing plan is defined; a From field 3028 enabling entry of a beginning number of a range of numbers; a To field 3029 enabling entry of a last

-192SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 number of a range of numbers; a Carrier ID field 3023 which is an optional entry for numbers defined in the Dialing Plan order that are only completed by the DAP if originated by the specified Carrier Code within that originating country, and, that are only entered when a Country and Carrier Code is specified.

As shown in the example web page display of Figure 29 (m) , a second section referred to as the Termination section 3030 comprises fields/command buttons enabling a customer to define the termination data for a dialing plan. The field/command buttons include: location name field 3031 which is an alphanumeric field enabling entry of a description of the termination, e.g., company name or location; a type field 3032 enabling selection from a drop-down list of the following termination types to which the Private or Public Number sends the call: a DAL - used for Dedicated Access Lines, an IDDD - used for all Public Numbers, a CMA used for Customized Message Announcements, and, a EXCL - used to exclude a number or range of numbers; a Location ID field 3033 of a Dedicated Access Line (DAL) which can be entered (e.g., Shared DALs) or selected from the drop-down list. If the termination type is DAL, a section/entry is required; a Country field 3034 for selection of the Country Code (where call will terminate) from the values in the drop-down list and is required entry when IDDD is the termination type; a Prefix Digits field 3035 for entering the numbers at the beginning of the terminating number (not including

-193SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 the Country Code) which are the same for all numbers in a range, or the entire terminating number when entering individual numbers; a Reuse Digit Length field 3036 enabling entry of the number of digits from the dialed digits that will be reused in the terminating number when used in a range with Prefix Digits. This field displays the default value, e.g., 00, and is protected when terminating numbers are entered individually or when the termination type is CMA or EXCL. When a value is required, it can either be typed in or selected from the drop-down list; a Nature of Subsequent Address field 3037 enabling entry of the out pulse digits delivered to a customer's equipment (CPE). When the termination type is a DAL, the default is changed from None to any of the other selections. However, Subscriber is typically selected, as National and International would only be used by a private network owner; a Point of Origin Routing Indicator check box 3038 to indicate Point of Origin Routing which enables a customer to designate an alternate DAL, that overrides the DAL specified in that customer's Dialing Plan, based on the originating switch. This helps to manage load balancing for DALS, e.g. for Vnet; and, an <OK> button and a <Cancel> button for closing the Dialing Plan Attributes window without making changes to the feature information.

When opening an existing ID Code/Set order or creating a new one, the nMCl Interact ONM system ID Code/Set Order option allows a customer to define a

-194SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 unique 1 - 11 digit number ID Code and assign that number to an individual. ID Codes preferably have a range privilege assigned to them, therefore, a customer can tailor calling privileges and assign them to individuals via their ID Code. Once an ID Code system is established, the code is entered after the dialed number on every call made. It should be noted that the network DAP switches (Figure 28) verifies ID Codes. Thus, a correct ID Code must be entered or the MCI switch will not complete the call. In the preferred embodiment, there are two types of ID Code Set Orders in nMCI Interact Outbound NM: 1) Add/Change ID Code Set Order; and 2) Delete ID Code Set Order.

In the preferred embodiment, the Add/Change ID Code Set Order enables a customer to perform the following functions to implement ID Codes within that customer's Vnet/Vision Network: 1) Define ID Code Length (1 - 11 digits); 2) Assign Range Privileges to ID Codes? 3) Define Local Sets; 4) Generate ID Codes Sequentially or Randomly to an ID Code Set; 5) Individual Entry of ID Codes; and 6) Modify/Delete ID Codes within a Set.

Figure 29(n) illustrates an example web page 3050 comprising an Add/Change ID Code Set Order Window comprising the following sections: 1) an order administration section 3051 for providing administrative aspects of the order such as: enabling entry of a date/time when the order is to be implemented by the host; selecting a priority based on

-195SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 the user's security access privilege; establishing an order status, e.g., approved or not approved for new orders in accordance with a users authorization; 2) an ID Code Sets in Inventory section 3060 used to retrieve ID Code Sets from inventory that are not included on another order. This is accomplished by selection of the retrieve button 3065 and enables display of the ID Code Set details including: ID Code, Set ID, set types, defined ID Code length; a description of the ID Code Set, e.g., by location; and, a component count indicating the amount of ID Code Sets in the ID Code/Sets inventory section; 3) an ID Code Set Updates Section 3070 for populating the ID Code/Set order window by moving selected ID Code/Sets from the ID Code/Set inventory section or by adding new ID Code/Set to the current order; and, 4) an attributes section 3080 for populating an area of screen display with a list of attributes, or features, for a selected ID Code/Set in the inventory or updates section.

With more particularity, the ID Code Set Order administration section 3051 of web page display 3050 comprises the same field descriptions as mentioned herein with respect to the Dialing Plan order administration including: 1) a set date/time field 3052 for when the ID Code/Set order is to be implemented by the host; 2) a priority field 3053 for establishing dialing plan order priority (depending on security access privileges); 3) a current order status field 3054; 4) a Remarks text field 3055 optionally used to

-196SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 describe the contents of the ID Code/Set order; and, 5) an Approve field 3056 such that when checked, indicates the order is approved and transmitted to the host.

The ID Code/Sets in inventory section 3060 used to retrieve ID Code/Set(s) from the ID Code/Sets inventory comprises the following field/command button descriptions: a Set field 3061 indicating the ID Code/Set; a type field 762 having an indication of a local (L) set or a global (G) set; a Len field 3063 indicating the defined length of the ID Code; a description field 3064 indicating the description of the ID Code Set, e.g., location; a Component Count field 3066 indicating how many ID Code Sets are within the ID Code Sets in Inventory section; a Retrieve button 3065 such that, when selected, retrieves a list of a customer's available ID Code Sets in inventory that are not included in other orders. Selection of this option will enable a web page display having a Retrieve ID Code Sets from Inventory Window 3090 such as shown in Figure 29(o); and, a right arrow command button 3067 enabling a customer to move single or multiple (selected) ID Code Sets from the ID Code Sets in inventory section to the ID Code Set Updates to include on the current order.

The ID Code Sets updates section 3070 comprises the above-described Set, type, Len, description and component count fields and, a left arrow &lt; command button 3068 enabling a customer to move one or more highlighted ID Code Sets to the ID Code Sets in

-197SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 25)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

Inventory section; a Delete command button; and, an Add command button 3069 enabling the addition of new ID Code Sets to the order including functionality enabling the creation of an ID Code Set which can be added to an order and which must contain at least one ID Code prior to approving the order. Adding a new Set to the order entails specification of either a local or global ID Codes sets.

The ID Code Sets attributes section 3080 comprises the same field/command button descriptions as mentioned herein with respect to the Dialing Plan attributes section including: an Item field 3082, e.g., including ID Code Set and ID Code Information; a Value field 3083; a Set field 3084 which designates the information displayed in the Attributes section is for the selected ID Code Set, which can be either in the ID Code Sets In Inventory or ID Code Set Updates sections? an <Undo> button 3085; a <Del Code> button 3086 for deleting a selected ID Code; an <Add Code> button 3087 enabling display of a further Web page including an Add ID Codes to Set window, such as shown in Figure 29(p); and a <Close> button 3088 for closing the Add/Change ID Code Set Order window.

As mentioned above, selection of the ID Code Sets Retrieve button 3065 in Figure 29(n) enables a web page display of a Retrieve ID Code Sets from Inventory Window 3090 such as shown in the example web page display of Figure 29 (o) . From this window, a customer may specify search criteria or retrieve a predetermined

-198SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 amount of ID Code Sets having defaulted criteria. Particularly, the Retrieve ID Code Sets from Inventory Window 3090 comprises the following fields for retrieving ID Code Sets from customer inventory: a Set field 3091 enabling entry of the Set number; a description field 3092 enabling entry of a full or partial ID Code Set description, e.g., alphanumeric description; an ID Code field 3093 enabling entry of a specific ID Code; a Quantity field 3094 enabling a customer to enter a value specifying the quantity of ID Code Sets to include in the retrieval; an <Add> button 3095 for updating the list box in the selected dialing plans section with the group information from the Set, Description, ID Code, and Quantity text boxes; a <Remove> button 3096 enabling a customer to remove a highlighted display item so that it is not included in the retrieval request; an <OK> button 3097 for accepting all entries in the Retrieve ID Code Sets from Inventory window, and messaging the host; and, a <Cancel> button 3098 for closing the Retrieve ID Code Sets from Inventory window without accepting any changes.

As mentioned above, selection of the Add Code button 3087 in Figure 29(n), enables display of the Add ID Codes to Set window such as shown in the example Add ID Codes to Set web page 3100 of Figure 29 (p). As shown in Figure 29(p), the Add ID Codes to Set window 3100 enables the customer to delete ID codes from a set; add ID codes one at a time, e.g., single

-199SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 generation; sequentially generate ID Codes to the Set; and randomly generate ID Codes to the Set. For instance, the customer may enter the set information in the following fields: the Set field 3102 for which the ID Code changes will take effect; a length field 3104 setting forth the length of the ID Codes contained in the set; a description field enabling entry of text describing the set; and a type field indicating the set as local or global. With regard to the ID Codes generate options, a single generate option 3110 enables a user to add ID Codes one at a time to a set, e.g. by entering the number in the ID Code field 3112; a sequential generate option 3114 enables the user to specify a beginning ID Code number and a Quantity in entry fields (not shown). The nMCI Interact ONM will automatically generate sequential ID codes according to the quantity specified by selecting the Add button 3118 which updates a list box 3125 with information from the generated id Codes; and, a random generate option 3120 enables the user to specify a beginning ID Code number, an ending ID Code number, and, a Quantity in entry fields (not shown) . The nMCI Interact ONM will randomly-generate the specified number of ID codes within the beginning and ending range by selecting the Add button 3118 to update list box 3125. Selection of the <OK> button 3126 will enable acceptance of all the newly generated ID Code entries, messaging the host of the new codes, and, returning control to the Add/Change ID Code Set order page (Figure 29(n)).

-200SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 2B)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

11038.SF f:\work\1171\1103B\SPEC\11038.FOR

As mentioned above with respect to Figure 29 (a) depicting the nMCI Interact ONM web page display 2764, the control menu option 2720 provides a refresh option which enables an update of all internal lists that have been altered on the host NetCap system. Specifically, the nMCI Interact ONM system 2700 updates the following lists: the network ID, Range Privilege, ID Code Set, Billing Location ID, Customer Service ID, location/access type, and, provisioning carrier. It should be understood that Refresh option will not change the values of an open window that includes data from one of the lists.

Furthermore, with respect to the report menu option 2742 provided in the main web page display of Figure 29(a), users are enabled to inquire on their respective inventory for CPNs, Calling Cards, Dialing Plans, and ID Code Sets. The ONM system will display a respective Retrieve item from inventory, e.g,, selection of report option for CPNs enables the display of the Retrieve CPNs from inventory screen as shown in Fig. 29(f). Particularly, in the ONM system 2700, four inventory reports may be provided to customers: CPN, Calling Card, Dialing Plan, and ID Code Set. Reports may be requested from the screen display of Figure 29(a), however, will be delivered to the nMCI Interact Inbox message center 270, for client viewing and retrieval in the manner as described herein.

EVENT MONITOR

-201SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT7US98/20173

As mentioned above, another application of the suite of telecommunications network management applications is the event monitor and Broadband network performance reporting system 850. As shown in the high level process flow diagram of Figure 30 customers are enabled to request, specify, schedule and receive data reports relating to their Broadband, e.g., packet switched, data networks.

As shown in Figure 30, the Broadband (BB) reporting system includes a Broadband view client comprising the client workstation component 20 employing a web browser running, for example, Internet Explorer® 4.0 or greater, for enabling the generation of requests and receipt of responses from the Broadband system processes over the Web/Internet via a secure socket connection. As described herein, the StarWRS component 200 of the nMCI Interact system may be implemented to support Broadband report request, report retrieval, and alarm monitoring functions. All interactions with the Broadband reporting and system network management platform (SNMP) features occur between the Broadband client applet 852 and a Broadband server 860. Particularly, Broadband application's Java classes invoke a message class that has the Common Object code as an interface definition.

Integrated within the Broadband reporting system architecture 850 of Figure 30 is the nMCI Interact Web Server 24 and Dispatcher components 26 which provides for the transport between the BB client browser and a Broadband proxy interface including all authentication and encryption. Thus, secure communication from the

-202SUBSTTTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 customer browser to a DMZ Web server is enabled over a first secure TCP/IP socket connection, such as SSL, and, communication from the DMZ Web server over a corporate firewall to the Dispatcher server is enabled over a second TCP/IP socket connection, such as DES. These secure paths enable customer requests and server responses to be communicated between the client browser and the Broadband server 860. Specifically, the Dispatcher server 26 includes an integrated Broadband proxy application to forward user requests and responses to/from the Broadband server process 860 and to enable the Broadband functionality. As described herein, this proxy capability includes a multi-thread engine enabling multiple, simultaneously executing sessions supporting anticipated user load. The interface between the Dispatcher server and the Broadband proxy process is also message-based employing, e.g., TCP/IP socket transport, and, as will be described, a messaging protocol is defined that comprises a generic message header followed by proxyspecific data. For messages sent to the Broadband server, the generic message header is first sent followed by the proxy specific data. In the other direction, the same process is employed, i.e., the Broadband proxy sends the generic header followed by the proxy-specific response back to the dispatch server for communication over the firewall and back to the Web server.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 30, all Broadband responses including CSV data files are forwarded through the Dispatcher server 26 and

-203SUBSTTTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 intervening DMZ Web server 24 to the Broadband Inbox messaging server for subsequent access and eventual display at the client.

In the preferred embodiment, the Broadband (BB) server 860 performs the various database queries and function calls in response to requests received from the customer via the Broadband proxy 854. That is, the BB Client submits all requests and queries to the BB Server 860 using a generic proxy framework called BBProxyServer 854. These communications include Report requests, retrieval and viewing; requests for circuit information using SNMP Get commands; assignments of mnemonics for circuit names using SNMP Set commands; and, establishing a session to monitor alarm activities on circuits. Particularly, the Broadband server 860 is responsible for all tasks leading up to and including the generation of performance report and SNMP information including data collection, calculation, storage, and report generation.

As further shown in Figure 30, the components feeding information to the Broadband server 860 include: 1) a Performance Reporting System (PRS) server 880 for sending performance and statistical data to the Broadband server; and, 2) the SNMP platform 870 which is a tool that feeds real- or near real-time SNMP alarm and network event data to the Broadband Web server 860 via proxy interface 871. One such SNMP tool implemented by the assignee of the present invention is entitled NetExpert. The Broadband server 860 additionally supports SNMP get/set functionality which is a menu-driven facility enabling a user to

-204SUBSTTTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 query the SNMP database for the value of a variable in a Management Information Base (MIB) 887, or, to set the value of certain variables in the MIB, as will be described in further detail hereinafter.

The Broadband server 860 additionally supports communication with the StarOE component 39 which provides order entry functions including functionality necessary to manage (create, update, delete) Broadband users and, allows for a feed of the appropriate information to the Broadband server in order to associate the appropriate reports and Broadband functionality to the right customer once given admission to the Broadband service. As described, the StarOE order entry process essentially provides the means for authenticating users, and, initiating report generation. A messaging interface is provided between StarOE to the Broadband Web Server 860 functioning as a client to receive authentication information and Bill ID and Level of service information which are supplied in response to launch of the Broadband applet.

To establish Basic level reporting, the Broadband Server 860 transmits new customer information to the PRS1 component 880 when it is received. The customer Bill XD and circuit information are entered into the PRS1 tables via messaging interface 884. Any additions to or updates of User Name, User ID, Bill IDs are periodically passed from the Broadband Server 860 to the PRS1 880 via FTP messaging interface 883 in response to the periodic, e.g., nightly, updates to the Broadband server from StarOE. Particularly, the Broadband server 860 receives from the StarOE server 39

-205SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 a file containing all current BB customers with the following information: a date/time stamp; a username; a userid; a service level indicator; and, the number of billing ids and bill ids. For the level of service indicator, Broadband offers the following options: 1) Basic; 2) Standard; 3) Enhanced SNMP; 4) Premium; 5) Enhanced Ad hoc Reporting; 6) Enhanced SNMP + Ad hoc Reporting; and 7) Dedicated SNMP. Specifically, from the information downloaded from StarOE, comma separated value (CSV) reports are automatically created on a daily basis by the PRS1 from the inception of service until service is discontinued. As an example, for the Basic level of service, the Broadband Server delivers three (3) CSV Files to StarWRS Inbox 270: Configuration report, Circuit usage, and PVC usage.

Referring to Figure 31, the PRS device 880 performs the following: 1) queries the MIB 887 on each switch via interface 886 for information about that circuit; 2) collects the data; and, 3) assembles that data in the appropriate tables for storage in the Broadband Server database 885. A nightly process between the RMS 872 and PRS database 280 synchs up PRS level of service information with the RMS 270 to determine what level of reporting is assigned to each circuit/PVC and runs the appropriate reports. From these components, the following functions, reports and capabilities are available to nMCI Interact users: a) near real-time performance statistics; b) customer performance reports including: 1) Frame Relay Graphs including: Network Health (Daily-Monthly); Network Throughput (Daily-Weekly-Monthly); Busy Hour Circuit

-206SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

Trend (Daily-Weekly-Monthly) ; Customer Frame Delivery (Daily-Weekly-Monthly); PVC Utilization by Access Circuit Busy Hour (Daily-Weekly-Monthly); and Quality of Access Port by Hour (Daily); 2) Frame Relay Text Reports including: Network Throughput (Daily-WeeklyMonthly) ; Busy Hour Circuit Trend (Daily-WeeklyMonthly) ; Customer Frame Delivery (Daily-WeeklyMonthly); PVC Utilization by Access Circuit Busy Hour (Daily-Weekly-Monthly); Quality of Access Port by Hour (Daily); and, Customer Configuration (Daily); 3) Frame Relay Downloads including: Circuit Usage (Daily) and PVC Usage (Daily); and 4) SMDS Graphs including Circuit Statistics (Daily-Weekly-Monthly) and Busy Hour Circuit Trend (Daily-Weekly-Monthly). Additional capabilities include providing Near Real-time alarms and configuration reports (Frame and SMDS) relating to an MCI customer's virtual transport network. Thus, the Broadband system 20Q of the invention provides a tool set by which a customer can understand the performance of their virtual data network. It provides the customer with the ability to trend network performance statistics over time, and then to determine whether the network should be changed to ensure that it is operating at maximum performance levels (i.e., meeting business needs). The Broadband reporting system thus enables customers to review network performance data over a period of time, e.g., up to 45 days, by creating and saving reports on their workstation, a network server, or a floppy disk. Alarm trending and analysis, correlating alarm occurrences to network availability,

-207SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 network performance and problem resolution may also be performed.

A detailed flow diagram illustrating the CSV report creation process is now illustrated in view of Figures 30, 31, 32(a) and 32(b). As shown in Figure 32(a), steps 902-906 depict the addition of the User Bill ID to PRS1, the addition of a customer's level of service information to StarOE and, addition of any report suppression information to the RMS. As described, level of Service information is available from the StarOE system. Level of service information from StarOE is of a courser granularity and is used to enable access to the appropriate Broadband capabilities, based on the order entry process. A user can suppress the transmission of a report or set of reports using the BB application, however, this does not stop the collection of performance statistics, only the generation of reports.

The next few steps 908-914 relate to the data collection process. Specifically, data on the performance of all circuits associated with a particular Bill ID is collected from all switches in the ATM or Frame Relay Network by an automated periodic polling process, e.g., hourly. The addition of a new Bill ID to the PRS1 tables (step 902) is utilized by the polling process which process adds circuits and PVC to its polling requests based on association with the new Bill ID, as indicated at step 908. Then, as indicated at step 910, the poller queries the MIB 887 on each switch in the network for statistics on selected circuits and PVC on a cyclical basis, e.g.,

-208SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 every 15 minutes. As shown in Figure 31, the PRS poller function 896 polls the MIB 887 at each switch 888 in the network, e.g., Frame Relay or ATM network, in sequence. The Poller sends a UDP packet to the MIB on each switch in sequence for statistics on all circuits/PVCs enabled for Broadband service. In response to the UDP request, at step 912, the MIB returns all the current statistics on circuit/PVC data from the switch. In the event that a switch is not reachable, the polling process logs an error in a PRS1 error log indicating that the specific switch was not reachable. Next, as indicated at step 914, the PRS1 writes the data to a text file and a Sybase bulk loader process adds the information to a raw data table. Particularly, as shown in Figure 31, a PRS assembler process 897 distributes statistics to the appropriate tables in a PRS1 active database 880. The assembler process compares the previous hour's data to the data in the raw table, compares values and writes the deltas to the hourly tables, which tables are then replicated to the reporter.

Then, in Figure 32(a) at step 916, an automated process runs selected reports on available statistics in the PRS database tables. In the preferred embodiment, as shown in Figure 31, this reporting process 298 occurs nightly, however, it can be run on any periodic basis. The specific reports that are run are determined by the level of service for which the Bill ID is enrolled as stored in StarOE tables.

Referring to Figure 32(b), as indicated at step 922, for each Bill ID, the reporter determines which

-209SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 reports are to be produced, generates queries against the appropriate tables, runs the queries at the appropriate time and delivers reports to the users BB Inbox 270. Report creation is done in sequence: all dailies, then all weeklies (if appropriate) then all monthlies (as appropriate). Particularly, as indicated at steps 925 and 927, a control process s_RunAHReports is invoked to load all customer lists, and at step 925 calls s__GenReport which collects level of service information for all customers. As indicated at step 928, the RMS process returns level of service information indicating any report suppression, and, at steps 929, the s_GenReport creates and executes queries against the data collected in the PRS1 database. At step 930, result sets are written to a temporary report directory and are then compressed at step 933 and added to the PRS database which may store the report for a predetermined amount of time, e.g., one week. Next, as indicated at step 935, the reports are replicated using off-the-shelf components, e.g., Sybases's RepServer, and saved on a Broadband server report location database (RLD) 885 which can be remote mounted by the Broadband Server 860. Particularly, the PRS reporter 298 shares a drive on which these reports are located with the Broadband Server via a remote file mount. The Broadband Server database retains data and reports for a predetermined period of time, e.g., 45 days, prior to the current data.

Finally, as indicated at step 938, the Broadband Server 860 determines which reports have been produced

-210SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

<img file="CA2304543A1_D0016.tif" />

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 and forwards them directly to of with the Broadband Inbox component associated with the Bill ID. Broadband Server creates a unique filename for each CSV report and places each report on the Broadband Inbox 270 (Figure 30) for customer retrieval, as indicated at step 940. The steps of 922-938 are depicted in a condensed physical architecture diagram of the Broadband system shown in Figure 31.

As shown in Figure 32(b) at steps 925-927, 933935 a determination is made as to whether the processing performed in each step was successful. If the processing performed in each step was not successful, or, an error occurs, then the error may be logged in a log file 939 at the Broadband Server and at Inbox for subsequent review, when necessary.

Details of the Broadband report retrieval process 950 is now described in view of Figure 33. It is assumed that StarOE has already validated the user's id and password, and that the user is entitled to receive Broadband services. Thus, upon selection of the Broadband Services icon 93 from the nMCI Interact home page (Figure 5(b)) the user may enter into the Broadband Services system and particularly, to access the Broadband Client front end. A client Broadband applet is thus, downloaded to the customer who is presented with the Broadband main display screen, as indicated at step 952. An exemplary Broadband web-page BB Main Display screen 1720 is shown in Figure 34(a) which presents a variety of user-selectable Broadband options including: 1) an Inbox option 1722 enabling a

-211SUBSTTTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 user to retrieve their Broadband reports; 2) an option 1724 enabling a user to view SNMP alarms; 3) an option 1726 enabling a user to specify reports to be suppressed; 4) an option 1728 enabling a user to retrieve Broadband reports that have been archived; 5) an option 1730 enabling a user to receive information regarding their circuit locations; 6) an option 1732 enabling the get/set functionality for providing meaningful labels to circuit locations to improve report readability; and, 7) an option 1734 enabling the retrieval of a map viewer application for generating maps portraying the customer's virtual networks.

In the preferred embodiment, a Broadband Main Display applet is provided as a launching pad for accessing all of the aforementioned Broadband services. The Main Display applet is preferably a Java applet running inside the user web browser 20 and utilizing classes which extend the basic Java applet functionality in areas such as application management, user session management, user-interface, inter-applet communication, and client/server communications. Particularly, from the Broadband Main Display applet access to and communications between Broadband applications is provided using the Common Object COApplet, COApp, and COBackPlane services which are objects functioning in the manner as described herein. In the manner as shown in Figure 3, the Main Display applet BBMainDisplay inherits from COAppIMPL class with a COApplet interface and is launched from the nMCI Interact COBackPlane using the COApplet interface.

-212SUBSTÏTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

When a user clicks on a Broadband service toolbar button or menu item, BBMainDisplay creates an instance of a COApp(let) to manage the corresponding application. When the user exits from Broadband services, the COBackPlane is utilized to destroy the application and its windows.

The Broadband Main Display applet provides a menubar, toolbar, and status bar for accessing Broadband services according to the customer's subscribed service option which includes: Basic; Standard; Enhanced SNMP; Premium; Enhanced Ad hoc Reporting; Enhanced SNMP + Ad hoc Reporting; and Dedicated SNMP. As determined by the user logon session with the StarOE server 260, if the user is not entitled or does not have authorization for a particular service, the corresponding toolbar icon or menu item is disabled (ghosted-out) and will be rendered insensitive to user input in accordance with the customer service option.

When BBMainDisplay is launched, the Main Display first determines the user's Broadband level of service option, e.g., Basic, Standard, Enhanced SNMP, etc. A user selects a Broadband service, e.g., custom reporting, archive reporting, or SNMP features such as Get/Set and alarm panel by clicking on the corresponding toolbar icon or pull-down menu item on the Main Display applet (Figure 34 (a)). For the case of custom (Ad hoc) reporting of data, e.g., from the Frame Relay MIB, a custom reporting applet interface is provided. From this web interface, a customer can select from the available data variables (i.e. physical or logical circuit, data point value, time frame for

-213SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 report, etc.). Specific responsibilities of the custom report applet include: 1) allowing customers to define a custom report query using single performance statistics category, statistics range, and date/time range; 2) allowing customers to select reports presenting statistics relating to their current network Access Circuits or network PVCs. This comprises enabling a customer to select either Access Circuit or PVC reporting category type, in which case a drop down list displays current performance statistics for the selected category. The Customer then selects a single performance statistics category from drop down list; 3) allowing a customer to specify range on statistic value using relational operators and numerical values, e.g., value >=80%; 4) allowing a customer to specify report date/time range covering, for example, the previous 45 days of service, A customer can select start and stop date/time anytime within range; 5) allowing the customer to save the custom defined queries by providing a Save Query option; and, 6) providing an Auto Run function to allow custom reports to be run automatically and available when the default reports are produced through the Broadband Inbox. Once the user submits the custom report request it is forwarded to the Broadband Inbox for subsequent view.

When basic service option is provided, the Broadband main display applet has the responsibility of: 1) requesting service type (entitlements) either from StarOE authentication server or as data from BackPlane (Figure 3); 2) requesting reports that are no longer on the Inbox server to be retrieved from a

-214SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 report data archive if a pre-determined period of time has elapsed, e.g., 45 days, and provide these reports to the customer via the Broadband Inbox; 3) defining how the customer reports should be requested, e.g. report ID, date, etc.; 4) providing on-line context sensitive help for all aspects of the Broadband WEB application; 5) providing access to the Broadband User's Guide; 6) providing the ability to spawn separate dialog windows, for example, to explain reporting activity in progress; 7) providing a send mail function to provide the customer with a method to create a mail memo for distribution to a help desk; and, depending upon the customer's service option, 8) providing access to custom reporting capability (Ad hoc Reporting) via toolbar and menu; and, 9) providing access to the SNMP features (Get/Set and Alarm) via toolbar and pull-down menu.

Referring back to Figure 33, the user may select the BB Inbox feature as indicated at steps 954a-954c by clicking on the BB Inbox icon. By clicking the BB Inbox icon a download of the BroadBand Inbox applet is initiated, as indicated at step 956. Via this applet, the BroadBand View Inbox client requests all available report data (headers) from the Report Location Database as indicated at step 958. Then, at step 960, the RLD returns header information such as report name, id, location, date/time requested, data time produced to the client, and uses the information to autopopulate the entries in the Broadband Inbox at step 962. The report availability is then displayed in the BB Inbox (client) screen at step 964. It should be understood

-215SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 that by the time a user has received the welcome packages from nMCI Interact, backend data collection and report generation activities at the appropriate level of service have already begun. As a result, completed reports are available at the first login.

Figure 34(b) depicts an example Broadband view Inbox screen display 1740 having a screen area 1745 for displaying the currently available reports. Referring back to Figure 33, a user may retrieve any report for viewing by double clicking on the report desired which action causes a request for the report and the appropriate viewer to be sent to the BroadBand Server, as indicated at step 968. BroadBand Server responds by locating the file (using the RLD) and transferring the file to the user and the appropriate viewer to the client. In the preferred embodiment, the user is enabled to display comma separated value (CSV) textual reports, as indicated at step 971; network health multigraph reports, as indicated at step 972; and, map reports, as indicated at step 973.

Thus, in the preferred embodiment, the Broadband Report viewer component includes Java applet viewer classes that enable the downloading and display of performance reports generated from the Broadband server 860. In the preferred embodiment, there are at least two types of viewer classes providing the following reports: 1) Monthly Network Health Reports which are static standard and multi-graph reports having three information areas: i) domestic latency, i.e., network delays; ii) delivery, i.e., network throughput; and iii) Peak Utilization, e.g., based on committed

-216SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 information rates; and, 2) Daily Network Health Reports which are static standard and multi-graph reports having the domestic latency, delivery and Peak Utilization reporting views, in addition to a fourth reporting Exceptions view. Besides having the ability to select reports on a daily or monthly basis, a custom reporting Java applet is provided to enable customers to select Broadband ad hoc (one time) reports at any previously defined interval. For example, a customer may have a standard Daily Throughput Performance report delivered each day. However, for a particular day, the same customer may choose to submit an ad hoc Throughput Performance report for a previous time interval, e.g., previous week, or previous month. In the preferred embodiment, the Broadband web server adds completed report data in CSV to the Broadband Inbox server 270 which component enables the client reporting viewing process 215 to display reports. Particularly, the BB client application loads the report viewer, which loads the requested report and displays it to the user. For CSV/spreadsheet reports the user has the option to manipulate the data in the viewer. When viewing multi-graph reports such as the Network Health report, the viewer provides drill down capability: by double clicking on a section of a graph, the supporting data is displayed.

The Broadband Report Viewer component additionally includes Java applet classes enabling the display of customer configuration maps which are two dimensional maps having certain locations highlighted, e.g., customer gateways, in addition to lines connecting two

-217SUBSTÎTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 or more locations representing a customer's dedicated data transport paths, e.g., permanent virtual connections (PVC), as will be hereinafter described in further detail. Besides having the ability to generate network performance reports and configuration maps, the Report Viewer component of the Broadband Reporting tool includes Java applet classes enabling the presentation of real- or near real- time alarm and network event data obtained from the network management platform, NetExpert 870 as shown as Figure 31. Via a proxy application 871, events and alarm notifications are sent to the BB server 860 which processes the alarms for communication through the dispatcher/BBProxyServer applications directly to the BB client 852, via secure TCP/IP socket messaging, as will be described in greater detail hereinafter.

Referring back to Figure 34(a), the selection of the report suppression option 1726 will enable the presentation of a BB view report suppression screen 1750, an example screen of which is shown in Figure 34(c). From this screen, the user is enabled to suppress or enable the particular selected report name, type, schedule, by selecting pull-down menu 1755.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 34(a), the selection of the archive option 1728 will enable the presentation of a BB view archive report screen 1760, an example screen of which is shown in Figure 34(d). From the screen of Figure 34(d), the user is enabled to select the archived report to be displayed at the BB Inbox by name, type, scheduling period, and reporting time period in entry fields 1769.

-218SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

As further shown in Figure 34(a), the selection of the circuit location option 1730 will enable the presentation of a BB view circuit location screen 1762, an example screen of which is shown in Figure 34(e). From the screen of Figure 34(e), the user is enabled to retrieve network configuration information pertaining to that customer's network by clicking the appropriate circuit id and location field from a list 1763. By clicking on this field, a textual report containing circuit configuration information may be displayed. The preferred method of reporting to a customer the current configuration of their MCI supplied virtual data network is via a web base geographical image map. The Broadband mapping report and Customer Configuration Map report are available for customers of all levels of service via the Broadband reporting system.

Preferably, all Broadband customers receive a basic report set comprising information on utilization, throughput and treatment of data transmitted over their virtual data networks as part of the default report set for the selected service option. Each service, e.g., SMDS and Frame Relay option, is provided reports specific to the performance indicators of that service (e.g. utilization, throughput and treatment of data transmitted over the virtual data network). The actual reports and the reporting interval may be unique, based on the type of report although default reports are available. A Customer Configuration text report is included within a default set of reports. The mapping report is preferably updated on a daily basis based on

-219SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 changes that have occurred within the customer's network in the previous 24-hour period. As the update is dependent upon a successful completion record, update latency can be greater than 24 hours from the actual event causing the change.

The data source for the customer's Configuration Map and Customer Configuration text reports includes: a customer name; Billing id; contact (name and phone number of customer representative for this account ) ; customer's mailing address; and the company providing FR service, e.g., MCI; a location field comprising a mnemonic identifying the MCI point of presence (POP),

i.e., the city and state where the circuit is located; a circuit name assigned in circuit order management system for customer's FR access; a gateway field containing a mnemonic identifying the gateway that services this circuit; a Network Mgt. ID field that identifies the NetExpert system (Figure 30) address by gateway, slot, port, and channel in the router card cage for this circuit; a Bandwidth field indicating circuit speed; a # PVC field indicating the Number of PVCs associated with this circuit (circuit name); a CIR total field indicating the sum of the CIRs for all PVCs on this circuit? an OVR SUB (%) field indicating the CIR Total (above) divided by the bandwidth times 100; a PVC field indicating a PVC number; a Gateway field comprising a mnemonic identifying the gateway that services the circuit on the A side of the PVC? a Circuit field indicating the circuit name assigned to

-220SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 the A side of the PVC; a DLCI field indicating the DLCI assigned to the A side of the PVC; a CIR field indicating the CIR for the A side of the PVC; a Gateway field comprising a mnemonic identifying the gateway that services circuit on the B side of the PVC; a Circuit field indicating the circuit name assigned to the B side of the PVC; a DLCI field indicating the DLCI assigned to the B side of the PVC; and, a CIR field indicating the CIR for the B side of the PVC.

As mentioned above, the BB Report Viewer component includes the capability of displaying maps. The Map viewer displays all available (BB enabled) circuits provisioned for the user. Clicking on a circuit enables a display of the latest statistics for the circuit. All display functions including sorting, saving to disk and printing the report are executed by the viewer locally.

In the preferred embodiment, there are two graphical views of the configuration report to support both the Standard and Enhanced service level options: Figure 35(a) illustrates the first map view 1770 which presents a two dimensional map of the United States with all end points of a customer's virtual data network represented with an indicator 1775, e.g. a star; Each star represents a customer's circuit end point location within an MCI data network, but may also indicate non-domestic frame relay, SMDS or LEC access end points. As shown in the Figure 35(a), selection of the View all PVC's button 1778 enables the

-221SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 presentation of all circuits supported in the network. A second map view 1776 may also be displayed such as shown in Figure 35(b). From this view, the customer may drill down on a selected endpoint by clicking on an identified location 1777 and receiving a changed view (text box) that includes a description 1779 of the physical circuits supported by that network end point. Thus, a click on any identified point provides greater detail about the circuits supported from that end point including: circuit location; Circuit number; Gateway mnemonic; Network Management ID; Bandwidth; # PVC; and, CIR Total. As shown in Figure 35(b), lines connecting PVC end points are also drawn by a mouse click on an identified end point. In the preferred embodiment, map views of Figures 35(a) and 35(b) are supported by invocation of Java applets which have the advantage that an image map implemented as a Java applet provides instant feedback to users. When a user clicks on a map displayed by a Java applet, the applet locally computes a response to the click and instructs the browser to load a new page.

Referring back to the report retrieval process flow 400 illustrated in Figure 33, at step 964, the customer is further enabled to delete a report by selecting the delete report option. To delete a report, the user highlights the report in the Inbox listing (Figure 34(b)) and selects a delete function, as indicated at step 966. In response, at step 970, the client submits a delete request to the BB Inbox Server which locates the report, logs the request, deletes the

-222SUBSTÎTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 file, and returns an acknowledgment to the client, as indicated at step 974. Upon receipt of the acknowledgment, the Inbox client refreshes the display to reflect the deletion. Errors in the deletion activity result in an error message which is logged at the server, and returned to the Inbox client. In response, the client may notify the user of the deletion failure by a pop-up dialog box on screen.

For the case of accessing SNMP capabilities, an SNMP application is launched from the Broadband SNMP Main Display Application if the customer has the SNMP dedicated or PRS Enhanced service option. Specific responsibilities of the SNMP application include: 1) providing SNMP Get/Set operations including: obtaining the selected variables from the Enterprise MIB upon initialization; 2) communicating with BBProxyServer and Broadband server database; 3) invoking Get/Set operations on MIB and returning results and displays; 4) providing an Alarm Panel for displaying alarms and event reporting; 5) handling customer near real time notification of updates to these alarms if the customer's web browser is pointed to a Broadband web page; and, 6) providing customer with SNMP get capability for the lowest interval data, e.g., 15 minutes to 1 hour.

Thus, as further shown in Figure 34(b), the selection of the SNMP Alarm option 1724 enables the presentation of a BB alarm panel screen 1765 an example screen of which is shown in Figure 34(f). From the screen of Figure 34(f), the user is enabled to retrieve and view their virtual network alarm conditions

-223SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 including the following indications: an alarm type; circuit id? alias; alarm severity level; alarm trap level; alarm description; and, date of the alarm.

In one embodiment, as shown in Figure 34(f), the alarm data is handled by listing all of the PVCs and the associated Access Circuits as well. For each PVC and Access circuit all relevant events and alarms will be displayed. Preferably, color coding is used for indicating alarm severity in compliance with OSI standards, e.g., orange for major, red for critical. In the preferred embodiment, Broadband alarms may be grouped into two categories: Network Detected alarms and User Defined alarms. Network Detected alarms include: Set alarms that are generated when a condition exists indicating service degradation or failure, and Clear alarms which are generated when a previously set alarm condition no longer exists. Particularly, in order for alarm data to be updated, the alarm collection server process invokes two methods on BBProxyServer: 1) a recordAlarm method which records an alarm and writes the alarm data to the database; and 2) a clearAlarm method which clears an alarm and removes it from the database.

It should be understood that all Network Detected Alarms are event-based and discovered by SNMP Network Management tool. User Defined Alarms include Ad-Hoc Threshold alarms which are generated in instances where a customer set value in a custom report is exceeded. The alarms are generated as the reports are updated, based on the polling frequency, and only when the customer set threshold is exceeded. User defined

-224SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 2β)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 alarms additionally includes SNMP alarms which are generated when a customer defined alarm condition exists based on the SNMP service.

Assuming that order entry for the user has been completed and the user is provisioned with a level of service which includes SNMP functionality, the user has additional access to SNMP functions Get and Set. The Get and Set represent paired functionality which is accessed when the user selects the SNMP Get/Set option 1732 from the BroadBand View Main Display of Figure 34(a). The selection of the SNMP Get/Set option 1732 enables the presentation of a BB SNMP Get/Set screen 1731, an example screen of which is shown in Figure 34(g). From the screen of Figure 34(g), the user is enabled to: Get SNMP statistics and Set SNMP name.

Particularly, the process flow for providing SNMP Get/Set capabilities begins by invocation of an SNMP applet which is sent to the client workstation by the BB Server application. By selecting the SNMP Get/Set button 1732 (Figure 34(a)) from the main display causes the creation of a SNMPGetSetApp (COApp) object to manage the session and create a series of objects, SNMPGetSetFrame, SNMPGetSetView, SNMPGetSetModel and SNMPGetSetController to handle the presentation to/interaction with the user. This also results in the presentation of the get/set display window (Figure 34(g)) having a dialog box 1731 presenting the user with the customer, PVC or circuit to be queried. Particularly, the SNMP client stub invokes the following BBProxyServer methods for populating the dialog box with the PVC and circuit information: 1) a

-225SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 getSnmpCategories{) method for communicating the request to retrieve SNMP variables from the MIB; 2) a getPVCList() method for returning a list of customer PVC's; and, 3) a getCircuitListt) method for returning a list of customer's access circuits, i.e., circuit IDs. Preferably, the appropriate service is invoked on BBProxyServer, the BroadBand database is queried and the results are returned to the customer browser for display. The user selects the desired SNMP category 1733, e.g., customer, PVC, or access circuit, to be queried. For instance, as shown in Figure 34(g), the selection of the PVC Statistics category 1733 will enable the variable list box 1735 to be updated with a list of only those variables from the selected category.

When a SNMP variable GET operation is desired, the user selects the particular SNMP variable. Then, the user invokes the get operation by selecting the GET button 1738 from the Get/Set display of Figure 34(g). Selection of the GET button causes the SNMP client stub to invoke the BBProxyServer side getAttribute method which returns object <String>, the string being an SNMP attribute name, to the customer browser. By invoking thegetAttribute method, the request is submitted to the BB server and communicated to the MIB to retrieve SNMP attributes, e.g., circuit and PVC statistics. The MIB obtains the latest SNMP data, transfers the data to the BB server, and returns control to the BB Client which handles the display of the data to the customer (Figure 34(g)). Particularly, the BB server issues a GetService request in turn to the MIB on the

-226SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 appropriate switch(es). The MIB locates the latest polled status information and returns the data to the server, which passes the data back to the client with a GetService Response message. Upon receipt of the data, the client closes the thread and updates the display. Finally, the user may submit requests for SNMP variables from other circuits, or, may end the session.

Likewise, when the user desires to Set a circuit name, the user first selects the particular SNMP variable and further, enters the alias variable value for the selected SNMP circuit. This alias variable value is entered in the value entry field 1737 as shown in Figure 34(g), Then, the user invokes the set operation by selecting the SET button 1739 from the Get/Set display of Figure 34(g). Selection of the SET button causes the SNMP client stub to invoke the BBProxyServer side setAttribute method which updates the selected SNMP variable in the Broadband database sets. By invoking the setAttribute method, the request is sent to the BB server which issues a setservice () request to the MIB on the appropriate switch(es). The MIB changes the (user defined) alias assigned to the circuit and returns an acknowledgment to the server, which passes it to the client with a Setservice Response message. Upon receipt of the data, the client closes the thread and updates the display, acknowledging that the circuit name has been changed. Finally, the user may submit new requests to set SNMP variables from other circuits, or, may end the session.

-227SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

The nMCI Interact suite of network management applications further includes an event monitor tool 1000 for enabling customers to monitor, over the Internet or a company Intranet, their dedicated voice and data circuits. A Web-based user-friendly interface presents network alarms on degraded or broken circuits and provides network performance and alarm information, thereby effectively increasing the efficiency of troubleshooting and allowing customers to make informed network management decisions. It should be understood that the event monitor tool may be integrated with the Broadband network reporting service to provide a comprehensive data and voice network performance reporting and alarm monitoring system.

More specifically, the Event Monitor tool 1000 of the nMCI Interact System gives customers the ability to: exercise alarm management from a single workstation, the management including, triggering the alarms and clearing the events; acknowledge or recognize new alarm conditions as they occur; receive notification of fiber outages that impact their data circuits; define or display customized troubleshooting procedures for specific alarm or circuits; access a comprehensive database of their dedicated voice and data circuits; display or print lists of active alarms; define or display customized alarm filters to specify which alarms will appear in the alarm presentation; and generate reports about network performance.

A general block diagram illustrating the event monitor system architecture 1000 is shown in Figure 36. Generally, as shown in Figure 36, the Event Monitor

-228SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 system 1000 is integrated within the nMCI Interact system comprising: the user web browser 14 which employs an event monitor GUI 1030 enabling the generation of requests and receipt of responses from various event monitor system server processes 1050 over the Web/Internet via a secure socket connection for presentation of event monitor's alarms and reports; report viewer 215 and requestor processes 212 (Figure 10) of the StarWRS tool 200 which provides the support for generating and presenting reports relating to the conditions of the customer's voice and data networks as described herein; a corresponding server side reporting component having the above described inbox, report scheduler and report manager components, in addition to alarm and report viewer and reguestor components implementing Java applets having viewer classes that enable the downloading and display of performance reports generated from event monitor server processes 1050. In the preferred embodiment, the viewer classes provide the following types of network alarms on dedicated circuits that carry the following service types: inbound services, e.g., toll free and 900 numbers; outbound services, e.g., Vnet/Vision, and PRISM; and data services such as TDS 1.5. The circuit types for which the present invention presents network alarms include: dedicated access lines such as DALs; TDS 1.5 circuits; TDS45 circuits, DDS/DSO point to point circuits; ISDN DALs; and SW 56 DALs. In addition, the event monitor reporting feature enables customers to review alarm data over a period of time by creating and saving reports. The reports which may be

-229SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 generated include alarm summary, alarm detail, alarm duration, data circuit performance, and DAL performance. The alarm and performance reporting scheme effectually allows the customers to perform alarm trending and analysis, and to correlate alarm occurrences to network availability, network performance and problem resolution. Reports for fault reporting may be requested through the report requestor component of StarWRS, and retrieved from the STarWRS inbox. Recurring reports may be requested on a timely basis, e.g., hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly. Moreover, through the report requestor, a user may specify whether the user should be paged or e-mailed when a report is in the inbox.

Also shown as part of the event monitor system architecture 1000 of Figure 36 is the web server/dispatcher component 1035 which provides for the transport between the web browser and an event monitor proxy interface including all authentication and encryption. Thus, secure communication from the customer browser to a DMZ web server is enabled over a first TCP/IP socket connection, such as SSL, and communication from the DMZ web server over an enterprise firewall to the dispatcher server is enabled over a second TCP/IP socket connection. These secure paths enable customer requests and server responses to be communicated from the client browser to the event monitor server 1050.

Specifically, the dispatcher forwards user requests to the event monitor server process 1050 that employs an integrated proxy application 1040 for

-230SUBSTTTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 receiving and interpreting the user messages and enabling the event monitor functionality. This proxy capability includes a multithreaded engine enabling multiple, simultaneously executing sessions supporting anticipated user load. The interface between the dispatcher server 1035 and the event monitor proxy process 1040 is also message-based, e.g., employing TCP/IP socket transport, and, as will be described, a defined messaging protocol which includes a generic message header followed by proxy-specific data. In the other direction, the same process is employed, i.e., the event monitor proxy 1040 sends the generic header followed by the proxy-specific response back to the dispatch server 1035 for communication over the firewall (not shown) and back to the user browser 20.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 36, the necessary CSV data files and report definition metadata files may be downloaded to the StarWRS inbox messaging server 270 for eventual presentation to the StarWRS browser-side components 212, 215 for subsequent access. It should be understood, however, that all event monitor responses including CSV data files and report definition metadata files are forwarded through the dispatcher and intervening DMZ web servers for eventual display at the client. Additionally, the event monitor may return a report object of variable length which includes the report data to be displayed at the client workstation.

In a preferred embodiment, the event monitor server 1050 performs the various database queries and function calls in response to requests received from

-231SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 the customer via the event monitor proxy 1040. Particularly, the event monitor server 1050 is responsible for all tasks leading up to and including the management of alarms and performance reports including data collection, calculation, storage, and report generation.

In operation, the event monitor server 1050 supports communication with the StarOE server component 39 which provides order entry functions including functionality necessary to manage (create, update, delete) event monitor users, and allows for a feed of the appropriate order entry information to the event monitor server in order to properly associate the appropriate event monitor functionality and data to the right customer once given admission to the event monitor service. Thus, a messaging interface is provided between StarOE 39 to the event monitor server 1050 functioning as a client to receive authentication information including logon user identifiers which are supplied in response to launch of the event monitor GUI applet 1030. The billing identifiers and levels of services, including the specific entitlement information are supplied from StarOE 39 to the event monitor server 1050 via flat files which may be generated daily.

From the back-end legacy host, the event monitor server 1050 receives statistics on voice (DAL) and data (TDS 1.5) services for providing its functionality to the event monitor users. The DALs are groups of dedicated 64K circuits that carry voice traffic to and from a customer's premise terminating equipment, i.e.,

-232SUBSTTTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

PBX, to a telecommunication service provider's switch. A TDS 1.5 data circuit is a dedicated point-to-point circuit that spans from one customer location directly to another. The data circuit includes at least two monitoring units, called Extended Superframe Monitoring Units(ESFMUs or ESF Cards), which generate alarms and collect statistics on the performance of the circuit. Alarms are presented near real-time and indicate that there is a failure associated with the data circuit. Performance statistics are compiled in 15-minute intervals and are used to derive performance alarms that provide the users with the indication that their network performance is degraded before the problem becomes service impacting.

Performance statistics are compared against preset performance parameters and deviations from these parameters are recorded. When a given threshold is exceeded, alarms are generated and notification is sent to the customers such that the customers may then view alarms and take necessary steps to correct the problem. The performance parameters and thresholds may be modifiable via the event monitor GUI applet 1030 by those customers having proper access level entitlements as verified by the StarOE 39. Each of the components shown in Figure 36 and their respective processes will be described in further detail herein.

Event monitor GUI client application

All alarms and reports for event monitor are accessible via the networkMCI Interact alarming and reporting structure established within the nMCI

-233SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

Interact home page 79 . Event monitor alarms are viewed via an alarm monitoring system in which both broadband and event monitor alarms may appear. The event monitor GUI client application is launched via the event monitor icon 87 on the home page (Figure 5(a)).

Reports for fault reporting may be requested through the report requestor component of StarWRS, and the inbox server.

In the preferred embodiment, the event monitor GUI client application 1030 is launched by selecting the event monitor icon 87 from the networkMCl Interact home page (Figure 5(a)). The event monitor GUI client application provides a menu bar, toolbar, and status bar for accessing event monitor services depending on the customer's service subscriptions. Event monitor service availability is determined by user logon session with StarOE server 1060. If the user is not entitled or does not have authorization for a particular service, the corresponding toolbar icon or menu item is disabled. Thus, in accordance with the customer service option, the corresponding service icon and/or menu item is not activated and would not respond to a user input.

In providing its basic services, the event monitor display applet may have the responsibility of: 1) requesting reports that are no longer on the inbox server to be retrieved from a report data archive if a pre-determined period of time has elapsed, e.g., 45 days, and provide these reports to the customer via the inbox; 2) defining alarm thresholds and parameters and trouble shooting procedures; 3) defining how the

-234SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 customer reports should be requested, e.g., report id, date, etc.; 4) providing on-line context sensitive help for all aspects of the event monitor web-based application; 5) providing the ability to spawn separate dialog windows, for example, to explain reporting activity in progress; and 6) providing access to custom reporting capability via the toolbar and menu.

In the preferred embodiment, the event monitor GUI application is implemented in Java to ensure platform independence and particularly is developed using many of the networkMCI Interact's common objects as described herein. Particularly, the Event monitor GUI application, via the COApp object, may create its own display space and present its user interface in a separate frame by having the space in one or more COAppFrame windows. The COAppFrame class and its COStdAppFrame subclass are wrappers for the Java Frame class which provide COApps with standard look-and-feel elements and implement some standard behavior, such as participating in COBackPlane's window management functions. The COAppFrame is a desktop window, separate from the browser. It presents the user with a preset layout of a menu, toolbar, status bar, enterprise logo, an application icon, etc., and a main viewing area. Since a separate frame does not need to be located inside a Web page, a concurrent (side-byside) access to more than one networkMCI Interact application service is possible.

In another embodiment, the event monitor GUI application's startup code may be implemented using the COApplet class.

-235SUBSTTTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

For determining the user's event monitor service options, the GUI client application requests and retrieves user profiles including the user entitlements from an event monitor customer database populated by a periodic feed (e.g., on a daily basis) from StarOE 39 (Figure 36).

From the event monitor GUI client application, an alarm management object is also launched upon initialization of the GUI client application. The alarm management object essentially creates a blank user interface and starts a thread to handle communications with the event monitor server for events or alarms. The alarm thread is created to run periodically, e.g., every two minutes. Specifically, the AlarmThread invokes a COAsynchronousTransaction with the web server to poll for current event monitor alarms. When the AlarmThread receives the data back from the web server, it creates a command to update the display and executes the command.

The event monitor alarms are generally grouped into two categories: voice alarms and data circuit alarms, including broadband and SNMP alarms. Voice alarms are further divided into two types: service outage alarms which are generated when a percentage of circuits in a trunk group are not available to complete calls; and traffic alarms which are generated when a percentage of DALs reach a predefined percentage for blockage, terminating failure rates and originating failure rates. Traffic alarms are based on data accumulated for five or thirty minute intervals. Data alarms are divided into two types: service affecting

-236SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 ' alarms which are generated in instances where the service cannot be used because there is a loss of signal, unframed signal or equipment failure; and performance affecting alarms which are generated when high error rates are received for ten seconds or more, out-of-frame conditions occur or frame slips exist but service is still available. A Drill down view depicting each alarm down to the individual circuit is available via the GUI as will be described below.

Reporting functionality

As described above, the existing and new event monitor reports may be requested via the report requestor, a component of StarWRS. The reports are then posted in the inbox. Customers view the reports by launching the report viewer applet, another component of StarWRS. Once the report is made available, at the customer's preference and selection based on priorities and severity, the customers may receive notification through one or any combination of page, e-mail, or fax in addition to the display option of the notification on the customer's inbox. For example, a customer may choose to receive page and email notification on all level 1 severity alarms and just display notifications in the inbox for level 2 severity alarms, etc.

Recurring reports may also be created by the user to run on a timely basis, e.g., hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly, as well as ad hoc (one time) reports. For example, a customer may have a standard DAL performance report delivered on a daily basis, and on a particular

-237SUBSTffiJTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 day, the same customer may choose to submit an ad hoc DAL performance report for any given interval, i.e., previous hour, previous several hours or days.

In addition, the event monitor may provide the ability to drill down within customer's premise equipment to view a breakdown of the customer's equipment and the ability to monitor performance and report alarms on individual channels within each circuit. Giving customers the capability to create and save a variety of reports and graphical views allows them to perform customized trending and analysis for maintaining better control and problem resolution schemes during their network management process.

Moreover, the event monitor presents via the report viewer applet, the map of the continental U.S. (World for global customers/services) for purposes of displaying the configuration of a customer's network. The customer may view their sites, the various connections between any two or more of these sites, and information about each specific site and circuit. The topographical mapping display allows customers to see a logical depiction of their network. The ability to drill down into individual sites, nodes and circuits are also available via the viewer applet. For example, if a customer has a circuit between New York and Los Angeles the highest level of the map shown may be the two locations on either end as well as the circuit between them. If a customer clicks on the circuit itself, raw data pertaining to the current throughput of that circuit or any alarm conditions that exist on the circuit may be displayed. Additionally, if the

-238SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 customer clicks on either of the two locations, further drill down for logical design layout of the customer premise equipment, such as a DSU or CSU, may be enabled. Furthermore, if alarms are present for that particular site, the drill down view may depict each alarm down to the individual circuit on a 24 channel ΤΙ.

Another type of reporting service provided by the event monitor is called an integrated management services bouncing busy intervals report. This report provides a picture of a DAL group during its busiest time of the day by reporting statistics for the current or one of the previous 7 days at the busiest interval. The busiest interval is defined to be the 30-minute or 60-minute time period in which total usage was at the highest point. Other reports which may be obtained through the event monitor include: monitoring and performance reporting of individual DS3 and OC3 circuits, IDSN channels, International voice or data point-to-point private lines, El lines; and trunk utilization reports.

Alarming functionality

The event monitor presents all detected alarms to the customer automatically, without the customer's intervention. The detected alarms within the event monitor are sent to the customers' inbox for spreadsheet display for on-line reviews. All current alarms are retrieved by the customer's web browser GUI applet using polling techniques at session initiation. Customers may define a period of time during which

-239SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20I73 their alarms remain in current status, allowing noncurrent alarms to be deleted.

In addition to providing alarm notifications to customers, the event monitor may also provide a scheme in which a pre-defined trouble shooting procedure, modifiable by a customer, is launched automatically when an alarm is detected. For example, if an alarm is generated regarding a fiber outage that impacts a customer's toll free circuit, an option allows the user to go directly from the alarm message in the inbox to the appropriate alternate routing plan. In order to integrate two services, i.e., event monitor with toll free network manager (TFNM), the event monitor key data and alarm are communicated to allow TFNM to find the appropriate routing plan associated with the outage. The key data may include: toll free number, service id, circuit id, and type of service, e.g., toll free or broadband. The TFNM application is typically launched directly from an alarm view with the above parameters for finding the associated routing plan. User profile information needed by TFNM for authentication and entitlement verification before actually proceeding with the alternate routing plan, are also passed as parameters to the TFNM application at the same time.

Performance metrics

The event monitor follows and conforms to general networkMCI Interact reporting standards in order to provide a consistent and common interface to the customers. Weekly reports do not have to be on a calendar week and may cover any consecutive 7 days.

-240SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

<img file="CA2304543A1_D0017.tif" />

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 '

Monthly reports are, unlike the weekly reports, calendar based and are defined to cover the entire month. Ad-hoc reports are reports outside the preselected reporting structure and are available to customers within two minutes from the point of request by customers.

In a preferred embodiment, the event monitor alarms are distinguished into two types: event-based alarms, and statistical alarms. Event-based alarms are alarms generated on the physical connection between the customers CSU/DSU circuits and the telecommunication service provider's switches, e.g., alarms occurring due to a loss or bring-down of a circuit. In addition, the customer may specify this notification to be sent as a page, fax, or e-mail. In these cases, the notification is sent within the required 30-second window from the moment the alarm is detected by the event monitor.

Statistical alarms are alarms generated due to the percentage of down time or of other statistical nature. Statistical alarms depend on the frequency at which the customer's web browser is polled, e.g., 2-4 minute intervals. Once polling is established and an alarm is detected, the time-to-deliver notification of the alarm is similar to the event-based alarms, i.e., within 30 seconds.

The event monitor back-end configuration

Figure 37 illustrates an example of a back-end configuration 1002 for the fault management system for reporting telecommunication service conditions. The back-end configuration includes a network management

-241SUBSTÎTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/ÜS98/20173 system 1004 which collects network events, including alarms and traffic densities from a common carrier network 1006. All of the events collected by network management system 1004 are reported to an event monitor host 1008. The common carrier keeps track of the performance and network faults for network 1006 through a myriad of network management systems 1004 and routes the information in real-time to the event monitor host 1008. In order to provide information regarding a particular customer's leased services, events collected by event monitor host 1008 are downloaded to event monitor server 1050.

Event monitor server 1050 accumulates in near real-time a database of events pertinent to each customer's leased services. The accumulated data is viewable via the client browser application GUI and also via the StarWRS reporting system as described above. Because individual customers may subscribe to various different services which may experience different events, event monitor server 1050 must not only collect different sets of data on a real-time basis, but the client browser application GUI and the reporting system must also present the data in a format relevant to the particular services to which the customer subscribes. This data may be organized for display to the user in an event queue.

In the preferred embodiment of the present invention, event monitor host 1008 is an Integrated Network Management System (INMS) host implemented as an IBM S/370 mainframe and the event monitor server 1050 is implemented as the DEC Alpha and Sun Solaris; the

-242SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 architecture of this embodiment is depicted in Figure 38. The present invention may be implemented in other ways, as would be apparent to one skilled in the relevant art.

Referring to Figure 38, the INMS host 1008 operates in an IBM Customer Information Control System (CICS) environment with a Transport Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) connection to DEC Alapha event monitor server 1050, which operates under the DEC UNIX operating system.

The Server 1050 comprises two servers: a Structure Query Language (SQL) server 1016 and an open server 1018. Open server 1018 receives events from INMS host 1008 and stores them on a database 1010 stored on server 1050. The SQL server 1016 is a database engine providing access to and managing database 1010. In the preferred embodiment, database 410 is a Sybase® database and SQL server 406 is a Sybase® SQL server.

The Database 1010 compiles information that is sent on a regular basis by INMS host 1008. The data stored in the SQL server may be queried at will by a user via the client browser application for analysis. Database 1010 is a relational database using SQL server 1016 as the database management system (DBMS). In the preferred embodiment, database 1010 comprises a database having four partitions.

The Database 1010 includes a number of tables of data which are accessed by the client browser application GUI to event displays, including alarm displays, alarm report, facilities cross-references and event log displays. In addition to the StarOE

-243SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 authentication and entitlement checking, user access to database 1010 is monitored by SQL server 1016; levels of security may be provided to permit tiers of access to different levels of information within database 1010, as would be apparent to one skilled in the relevant art.

The data within database 1010 is organized in views. For example, an alarm view provides an alarm description, an alarm severity representing the degree of consequence for the alarm, and selected conditions associated with the alarm.

The interface between INMS host 1008 and server 1050 is two-way. In this scenario, the INMS host 1008 is a client, issuing calls for stored procedures to SQL server 1016 via TCP/IP when there is an event to report.

When a new customer is provisioned, the Event Monitor server 1050 makes a client call to an INMS host session and updates the user profile table on the INMS host.

Figure 39 is a high level logic flowchart depicting the operation of the preferred embodiment of the present invention. Typically, a customer subscribes to several particular leased services. In order to limit data collection to data germane to those particular services, the user must specify the data to be collected. The user does this by defining an event view of data to be collected, as shown in a step 1020. The event view specifies, for example, which services are to be monitored and what data is to be collected and reported for those services. For example, the

-244SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 event view may include the following items: Severity: critical, major, minor, informational, no alert; Service Types (MCI): 800, 900, TDS 1.5, TDS 45, VNET, Prism®, Vision®, ISDN, SW56, and DDS/DDO; Corporate Identifiers: A list of corporate identifiers related to the customer's enterprise and for which the user is authorized access; Facilities: All elements of a physical telephone plant required to provide a service and to which the user is authorized access (for example, trunk groups and circuits); Data Elements: The user can configure a customized event view by selecting the data fields to be displayed; Date and Time Elements: The user can configure a customized event view by selecting the date and time period for the custom event view; Sort Order: The user can configure a customized event view by selecting, for example, the data fields on which the data to be displayed is sorted,

Once the event view has been defined, the client browser application transmits a transaction request to the server 1050 via the web/dispatch server. A predefined stored procedure, which takes as input a where clause and an order by clause, is used to create the event view from data stored in database 1010. In the preferred embodiment, the SQL statement is constructed such that each element/field is joined by an AND and values within each element/field are joined by an OR. Thus, a partial SQL statement would be similar to:

Severity = critical OR severity = major

-245SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 28)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 ’

AND

Service Type = VNET AND

CORPID = 123434 OR CORPID = 32432423 AND ... etc.

The SQL statement created in step 1023 is forwarded to SQL server 1016. The SQL statement identifies to SQL server 1016 the particular stored procedure to be activated to obtain the event view specified by the SQL statement. The SQL server 1016 then executes the stored procedure and builds a report of event data specified by the event view, as shown in a step 1028.

Once the event report is built, it is sent to the client browser via the web/dispatcher servers. The events are typically loaded into an event queue, which is a pass through mechanism existing between the INMS host and the Sybase database. The events in the event queue are sorted by sort criteria entered by the user when defining the event view, as shown at step 1032. In a preferred embodiment, the primary sort critérium is severity. The sorted events are displayed to the user on the client browser application GUI in a step 1034. Each event displayed is accompanied by an acknowledgment field for the user to indicate his acknowledgment of the event; for example, the user may acknowledge an event, if so authorized, by entering an asterisk in the associated acknowledgment field. When the user acknowledges an event, as indicated by the Y branch from step 1036, the client browser application reports the acknowledgment to server 1050, as shown at step 1038. When the user has acknowledged the last

-246SUBSTÎTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 ' event in the event queue, as indicated by the Y branch from step 1040, event processing ends. At this point, the user may either retain the session or close it.

If the session remains open, server 1050 will report new events defined by the event view as they are received by server 1050. When server 1050 receives a new event, as indicated by the Y branch from step 1042, processing resumes at step 1028, as shown in Figure 39.

Thus, in accordance with the event view defined by the user and communicated to event monitor server 1050, reports of events identified in the event view may be periodically forwarded, based upon a customer configurable interval, to the client browser application, and made available in an event queue for display to the user in order of the severity of the event.

The event monitor proxy

In the Event Monitor proxy process for validating, translating, and communicating customer requests to the fulfilling back-end system, validation includes of parsing incoming requests, analyzing them, and confirming that they include validly formatted messages for the service with acceptable parameters. If necessary, the message is translated into an underlying message or networking protocol. If no errors in the message are found, the proxy then manages the communication with the middle-tier server to actually get the request serviced. The application proxy

-247SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 25)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 supports application specific translation and communication with the back-end application server for both the Web Server (java applet originated) messages and application server messages.

Proxy functions and utilities provided include enabling multithreaded proxy functionality in order that the proxies may service multiple clients simultaneously.

In general, the Event Monitor proxy (Figure 36 at 1040) servers 1) invoke methods received when their corresponding client side stub method is invoked by the browser 1030 and; 2} return responses for the requesting client side stub method, if required.

In particular, the Event Monitor Server proxy 1040 is a process with multiple interfaces to the Event Monitor Web server database and GUI 1030, each interface providing method signatures for a series of discrete services via specific Java methods. These interface/method combinations include: 1) HSAlarmServerlnterface which provides SNMP alarm functionality via la) getAlarmList method; lb) recordAlarm method; and 1c) clearAlarm method. 2) HSMapServerlnterface which provides graphical configuration mapping functionality via 2a) getSwitchLocations method; 2b) getAccessCircuits method; and 2c) getPVCList method; 3) HSReportServerlnterface which provides report management and delivery functionality via 3a) getReport method; 3)b getReportList method; 3c) getlnboxReports method; and 3d) setReportGeneration method? 4) HSServerlnterface which provides Broadband Web server

-248SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 access functionality via 4a) logon method; 5) HSSnmpServerlnterface which provides SNMP Get/Set functionality via 5a) getSnmpCategories method; 5b) getPVCList method; 5c) getCircuitList method; 5d) setAttribute method; and 5e) getAttribute method; 6) HSUtilityServerlnterface which provides the interface for all other browser functionality via 6a) getLevelOfService method; 6b) getHelpDeskNumber method; 6c) getCircuitLocation method; 6d) setCircuitLocation method; 6e) getServiceType method; and 6f) getMessageCenterText method; 7) HSEMReportServerlnterface which provides an interface to the features available in the Event Monitor database via 7a) changeReportName method; 7b) createReport method; 7c) deleteReport method; 7d) getAlarms method; 7e) getAlarmTypes method; 7f) getCorpIDList method; 7g) getDALGroups method; 7h) getDataCircuits method; 71) getFacilities method; 7j) getReport method; 7k) getReportCategories method? 71) getReportList method; 7m) getServiceTypes method; 7n) getVoiceCircuits method; and 7o) updateReport method.

Each server side method 1) performs a specific back-end function. It may also, 2) return an object, or basic type (int, float, etc.) to the invoking client side stub. Most methods generally perform back-end database updates, keyed by values as documented below. Object returning methods return either 1) a single object made up of string values as documented below or 2) vector objects, including lists. The vector objects are variable byte streams and are essentially objects that are containers for a group of related objects.

-249SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

Every server side error exceptions, method has the ability of throwing in lieu of generated return codes.

CALL MANAGER

Another application of the suite of telecommunications network management applications is the call manager (CM) system which provides sophisticated mechanisms, e.g,, intelligent call routing, for call center customers to control delivery of toll free calls from the telecommunications enterprise network to call centers, including call centers having multiple Automatic Call Distributors (ACDs). Particularly, using the CM system the customers have the ability to define routing rules which, on a call by call basis, determine the best place to route incoming toll free calls. A high level overview of the call manager system environment 1100 is illustrated in Figure 40. The call manager system 1100 generally includes a service control point (SCP) 1110 for providing call manager routing features, known as call by call (CXC) routing; an intelligent routing customer element (ICE) (not shown); an intelligent routing host (IR host) 1112; and client workstations,

i.e., call manager webstation client 1130, and/or Nexus workstation client 1126, The SCP 1110 is a routing engine which essentially maintains call routing rules and uses those rules to determine where to route the calls. A typical call processing flow for a call received from a caller 1122 includes routing requests and responses from the enterprise switches 1124 through above-mentioned data access points (DAPs) 616 and

-250SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 remote data gateways (RDGs) 1118 into and out of the SCP 1110. The DAP 616 executes a routing plan by translating a toll free number passed by the switch 1124 into a network number, and maps it to an address. The RDG 1118 provides a standard gateway allowing communication between the SCP host 1110 and the enterprise's backbone network. The translated network number is then communicated to the SCP host 1110 via the RDG 1118.

Data collection and storage of ACD-based statistics from customer call centers and network statistics are supported by DAP traffic statistics (DTS) 1114, the IR host 1112 and the ICE components. The DTS collects network routing statistics from the DAP 2906 and passes them to the IR host 1112. The IR host 1112 stores routing statistics from DTS 1114 and the ACD 1120. The ACD 1120 data statistics are collected by the ICE for each ACD 1120, normalized by the IR host 1112 and provided to the SCP 1110. When the SCP 1110 receives a routing request, the SCP 1110 typically determines the best location to route a call by modeling each call center using periodic Automatic Call Distributor (ACD) 1120 data statistics to keep the model in line with what is actually going on at each location.

Upon completion of call processing according to customer routing plan, the DAP 2906 passes routing instructions to the switch 1124 for setting up the call to a customer's ACD 1120. The ACD 1120 balances the load of calls based upon customer defined rules such as the busy-ness of a call center. Calls may be

-251SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 distributed evenly using a round robin technique, or directed in which calls are routed based on a percentage allotted to each destination identifier. Voice communications are carried from the switch 1124 to the ACD 1120 which terminates the call at the appropriate trunk or destination identifier.

The routing capabilities supported by SCP 1110 include a termination selection based upon one or more of the following: initial list of eligible destinations, destinations eliminated from consideration based upon tested conditions, artificially biased evaluation criteria, percent allocation, and manipulation of user-defined pegcounter variables. SCP 1110 also supports the routing and blocking of incoming calls using event-level data based on one or more of the following characteristics: day cf the week, day of year, preference of destination choices, time of day, membership of the automatic number identification (ANI) or caller entered digits (CED) in a defined list of values, load balancing and/or availability at specific destinations, userdefined quota schemes, user-defined peg-counters, preference of destination choices, and artificial bias of load balancing algorithms.

The Call Manager Integrated Data Server(s) (CMIDS) 1140 are included to provide a front-end functionality to the SCP host 1110 and off-load various workstationrelated processing from the routing engine. In addition, the CMIDS 1140 may directly access data stored on the IR host or on other data servers.

-252SUBSTÎTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PC17US98/20173

Further details of the CMIDS 1140 will be described with reference to Figures 41 and 45.

As shown in Figure 2, the call manager system of the nMCI Interact System further includes one or more web servers 1132 for providing browser-based customer connections from the World Wide Web (WWW or Web) . The call manager web server 1132 passes the customer connections through to the SCP host 1110 via the CMIDS 1140, and thus delivers the call manager functionality to the call manager webstation client 1030 via a standard web browser and the Internet. The web server 24 is accessed by customers using the public Internet by directing a web browser 20 running on the call manager webstation to point to a call manager Uniform Resource Locator (URL).

The call manager webstation 1130 may be any hardware/software platform connected to the public Internet and running a supported web browser. The call manager webstation 1120 is typically owned and maintained by the customer. The call manager webstation 1130 includes a web-based graphical user interface (GUI) application which enables the customers to define their call terminations, and provision routing rules and associated tabular data to control routing by the SCP host 1110. The GUI application also presents alarms and near real time graphical displays of peg counts and ACD-based statistics. The application also provides reports and data extracts of historical data, including call detail records (CDRs), ACD-based statistic, and peg counts. In addition, user-id administration functions including business

-253SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 ’ hierarchy structures and function profiles may be performed via the call manager webstation's web-based GUI application.

In addition, the Nexus client workstation 1126 is included as an alternate client for the SCP host 1110. The presence of the call manager webstation 1130 does not preclude use of the Nexus client workstations 1126. The Nexus client workstation 1126 typically runs a graphical user interface application for enabling the customer to define their call terminations, routing rules and to display the ACD and routing information in either tabular or graphical forms. The Nexus client workstation 1126 are directly connected to the SCP host 1110 typically via dedicated circuits to customer premise locations or through the enterprise backbone networks for the enterprise locations.

Call Manager Webstation architecture

Figure 41 illustrates the call manager webstation component architecture showing interconnections among the components. In a preferred embodiment, the call manager webstation system includes three components of the call manager platform: client desktop systems, or a workstation, hereinafter referred also as the client webstations 1130 for delivering call manager functions through a standard web browser; a web server 1132 for supporting secure access for internet or extranet/intranet-based clients to call manager backend and thus to SCP hosts; and call manager integrated data server (CMIDS) 1140, forming an integral part of the back-end call manager application and supporting

-254SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 access to SCP host systems. As shown in Figure 41, the client desktop systems 1130 with Internet connectivity have standard browsers executing Java applets, i.e., a client GUI application, downloaded from the call manager web server 1132. The web server 1132 which is located in the above-described demilitarized zone (DMZ) 17 of the network MCI Interact system, include Java class files, but no storage of customer data to insure data security. The DMZ is generally bounded by two firewalls: an Internet firewall 25(a) and an enterprise intranet firewall 25(b). The call manager integrated data server (CMIDS) generally handles the business and data logic associated with the call manager functionality. Each of the above components will now be described in detail with reference to additional figures .

As described above, the client webstation 1130 provides a web-based graphical user interface (GUI) offering data management and data presentation features for the call manager system. The web-based front-end GUI is typically written using the Java programming language to insure platform independence. The client webstation 1130 typically includes a web browser with Java applets for the interface for providing access to the call manager webstation application from a standard web browser, e.g., Internet Explorer V4.01. In addition, the networkMCl Interact common objects are used for implementing many functions needed for client/server communications protocols. The Java applets generally reside on the web servers 1132 and are dynamically downloaded to the client browsers

-255SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 (client webstations) 1130 when the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for the call manager webstation client GUI application is accessed.

The call manager webstation client GUI application of the system of the present invention is typically invoked by clicking a call manager icon 97 from the networkMCI Interact home page 79b (Figure 5(b)). The customer is then presented with a toolbar for launching each of the call manager webstation application features as shown in Figure 49 at 11880. Moreover, online help is offered via hyper-text markup language (HTML) documents residing on the web servers 1132.

Each call manager webstation application feature may be accessed through an icon button in a tool bar 11880 as shown in Figure 49. Moreover, each feature is brought up in a separate window frame, giving a consistent look and feel throughout the web environment. As shown in the example display of Figure 49, the main features offered include: user setup and administration, i.e., security functions at 11882; business hierarchy setup; call by call application for rules writing and provisioning at 11874, 1884; graphic data display at 1878; alarm manager at 1872; and reporting and data extracts at 1876. A detailed description tor each of feature will be provided with reference to Figure 48 below.

For providing the above features, the client browser includes class objects making up the client interface code, in a first embodiment shown in Figure

42. Specifically, the user interface classes 1134 represent the main GUI objects for performing a call

-256SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 ’ manager specific functionality. Each of the classes,

i.e., user and business hierarchy setup, call by call application, graphic data display, alarm manager, reporting extracts, and authentication/ entitlements, performs the corresponding client-side functionality associated with the call manager features provided. The web server classes 638 provide the communication pass through to the back-end server. The communication classes (not shown) are employed between the client browser 1130 and the web server 1132 for requesting transactions and/or data sets from the web server 1132.

In the first embodiment, the communications from the client 20 and back-end CMIDS 1140 (Figure 41) via the web server 1132 are conducted using the common gateway interface (CGI). Requests from the client are typically first targeted at a CGI program, which then relays the request to the appropriate proxy process. Results are returned from back-end processes to the requesting client in the same manner. Each transaction or data request may be executed as a separate process, to allow processing to continue from other applications within the call manager webstation system.

In a preferred embodiment, a Netscape Server Application Program Interface (NSAPI) module may be used as an alternative to the CGI layer, the NSAPI module replacing the CGI-protocol communications layer between the client 20 and the web server 1132. The web server 1132 may be configured to pick up the NSAPI module and load on start up. Java client code 1134 (Figure 42) may be configure to refer to the NSAPI

-257SUBSTÎTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 module. For example, the Java client may invoke a method to communicate directly with the NSAPI module that performs the same function as the CGI program. Using the NSAPI module enhances performance and messaging throughput. When the server 1132 recognizes requests for the NSAPI module, it invokes a particular function in the module which performs essentially the same function as the CGI program. For example, a middle tier transaction handler, typically a message manager (msgmgr) and residing with the web servers 1132, may be modified to use the NSAPI instead of the HTTP CGI. The advantage of NSAPI over CGI is that a new process need not be created whenever a request comes in from the web client 20.

In general, and as described above, the web server 1132 provides a communication pass-through between the web client GUI application 1130 and the back-end call manager integrated data server (CMIDS) 1140 which may communicate with the SCP host. Figure 43 illustrates one embodiment of the software architecture showing communications between the client 20 and the web server 1132 and its components. The web server 1132 provides web-based call manager applications to web clients having a web browser on their client workstations 20. The web server 1132 includes an HTTP service manager 1152 and a message manager 1156. The HTTP service manager 1152 generally handles requests from multiple clients 1130 to download web pages and Java applets for display within a browser. Web pages include hypertext markup language (HTML) files and Java applets 654 that are downloaded to the clients 20 and are executed

-258SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 within a browser by the Java applets. The HTTP service manager 1152 also handles message transactions via the POST method defined by the hyper·text transfer protocol (HTTP) protocol. The HTTP service manager may be standard off-the-shelf World Wide Web server software, e.g., Netscape Enterprise Server.

The message manager 1156 is typically a CGI program that is executed as a spawned process within the HTTP service manager 1152 when a message transaction is received from the client via the POST method sent to the HTTPS port (443) 1150. The HTTP service manager 1152 spawns a process to run an instance of the message manager 1156 each time it receives a message transaction from the client. Alternatively, the message manager 1156 may be implemented as a function in the NSAPI module as described above. The HTTP service manager 1152 then invokes the message function in the NSAPI module. Both input and output streams are created by the message manager 1156 to receive message data from the client 20 and to reply back to the client 20. The message manager 1156 is generally responsible for the following: 1) accepting new user login by allocating a new session key for a newly created session; 2) attaching a dispatcher and proxy header to the web client's message and forwarding the message to the proxy server 1170; and receiving a SCP host response message from the proxy server 1170 and re-wrapping this message with dispatcher and proxy header and sending this formatted message to the web client 20. Message transactions are sent to the proxy server 1170 over a

-259SUBSTÎTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/2O173 new connection by opening a new TCP socket to the proxy server 1170 while the original socket from the browser is blocking, waiting for a response from the web server 1132.

Typically, communications to and from the client 20 take place over hyper-text transfer protocol secure (HTTPS), which uses hyper-text transfer protocol (HTTP) over a secure socket layer (SSL) encrypted channel. Applications may include web pages in the form of hyper-text markup language (HTML) files and Java applets 654 that are stored on the web server 1132. The HTTP service manager 1152 downloads the HTML files and Java applets 654 to the client 1130 upon request via the HTTPS port 1150, typically configured to port number 443. Each transaction from a client 20 is sent to the web server 1132 in the form of a logical message that has been encrypted. The web server 1132 decrypts the message and wraps the message with the user's information, including environment variables and a server-generated session identifier (id). The message is then encrypted and forwarded to the CMID 1140, or alternately, as will be described below, to the proxy server component of the CMID 1140.

The message transactions created by the client 20 may be transmitted over HTTPS using the POST method defined within the HTTP protocol. Using the POST method, a specified CGI program and more specifically, an invoked message manager runs as a thread in the HTTP service manager 1152. Message data is passed to the message manager 1156 by opening an input stream and an output stream within the thread. As described

-260SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 previously, the HTTP service manager 1152 spawns a message manager process 1156 for each message transaction sent to web server 1132. Each message transaction is a single request from the client 20 that is answered by a single reply from the web server 1132.

The web server 1132 also includes a session manager 1158 and a session table 25(a) for providing session management functions including the authentication of various web requests. A session is defined as the amount of time between which a client 20 logs onto the web server 1132 and when the client logs off. During a session, a client 20 may submit many message transactions to the web server 1132. State data for each session is stored in the session table 25(a). Session entries are deleted from the session table 25(a) when a user logs off or when a session is aged. Each message transaction received by the web server 1132 is associated with an active session. If a session no longer exists for a particular transaction, the message transaction is returned to the client 20 as rejected. The application then may prompt the user to login again.

Generally, the session table 1160 is a table that has state information on all current client sessions that are active on the web server 1132. When a client logs onto the web server 1132 and is authenticated, the client is provided a session id which is a unique server-generated key. The client holds this and returns‘it to the server as part of subsequent message transaction. The session table 1160 maintains a session key table which maps these keys to the

-261SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT7US98/20173 ’ associated session. The session table also includes a time stamp for each client session. A client session's time stamp is updated each time a message transaction comprising the session id for the session is received. A session is aged if no message transactions belonging to the session are seen after a given amount of time. If so, the session, with its entry deleted from the session table 1160, is logged off from the SCP host 1110.

The session manager 1158 is generally responsible for monitoring all current client sessions. The session manager 1158 typically monitors the sessions by accessing the session table 1160 and checking the current time stamp values for each current session. If the time stamp value shows that a session has aged, the session entry for the aged session is cleared from the session table 1160. Clearing the session entry forces any further message transactions associated with the session identifier to be rejected, requiring the user to restart the session.

For communications to and from the web client 20 and the back-end, the middle-tier web server 1132 supports three types of transport mechanisms which are provided by the networkMCI Interact platform: synchronous, asynchronous, and bulk transfer, as described herein. Particularly, the Synchronous transaction type typically has a single TCP connection which is kept open until a full message reply has been retrieved. The Asynchronous transaction type is typically used for handling message transactions requiring a long delay in the back-end server response.

-262SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

A server process handling the message transaction responds back to the web client 20 immediately with a unique transaction identifier and then closes the connection. The web client 20 may then poll the web server 1132 using the transaction identifier to determine when the original message transaction has completed. The bulk transfer type of transport mechanism is typically used for large data transfers which may be virtually unlimited in size.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 43, the web server 1132 includes a proxy server 1170 and a database 1172, e.g., Informix database. In this embodiment, the web server 1132 includes capability to communicate directly to the SCP host, bypassing the CMIDS 1140, by having the proxy server reside physically in the web server.

Figure 44 illustrates an example of call manager webstation application physical architecture when one or more call manager web servers 1132 bypass the CMIDS component of the present invention. As shown, the call manager web servers 1132 directly communicate the MML messages, i.e., translated client requests, to the Nexus SCP host 1110. In addition, in this embodiment, it is the SCP host 1110 which receives ACD statistics, alarms and other information from the IR host 1112, and communicates the information to the web servers 1132. The SCP host 1110 serves as the routing engine through which customer provision routing rules and associated tables or list, view alarms, route peg counts, etc. It houses the applications used by customers to manipulate the features of their automated call distributor (ACD).

-263SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

Figure 44 also shows the call manager web client 20 as being authenticated via the networkMIC Interact platform and the StarOE authentication and entitlement system 29 as described herein, i.e., the networkMCI Interact platform validates the password and authenticates with the StarOE system 631, verifying that a customer's profile allows access to the call manager webstation application. Upon valid authentication, the call manager webstation application session may begin with the client webstation communicating with the call manager web servers 1132 for providing the various functionalities.

In another embodiment, the data processing components for business and data logic, i.e., the proxy server and the database, resides with the CMIDS 1140, thereby reducing the functions of the web server 1132 to an application server providing primarily state and session management. Porting the proxy server 1170 over to the CMIDS 1140 may be easily performed. The transaction handler in the middle tier, i.e., the message manager 1156 still passes messages between the Web client 20 and the CMIDS 1140. The only change needed is that the transaction handler connects to the proxy residing on the CMIDS 1140, as opposed to the proxy 1170 on the web server 1132.

The proxy server 1170 generally processes message transactions from the client 20 and is multithreaded to handle multiple message transactions simultaneously. The proxy server 1170 is designed to process one type of message transaction or a set of message transactions. In this embodiment, routing of the

-264SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

<img file="CA2304543A1_D0018.tif" />

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 messages to and from the proxy is handled by the message manager 1156. The proxy server 1170 also interacts with a database 1172, e.g., Informix, to pass back information to be displayed by the client 20. The proxy server opens a connection to the SCP host 1110 to retrieve information about routing plans or report statistics by sending the SCP man machine language protocol (MML) commands. Upon retrieval, the proxy server 1170 formats a response message which is sent back to the client webstation 1130 so that it is displayed on the current web page. As the message reply is sent back to the client 20, each thread created by the proxy server 1170 is completed. It should be noted that the proxy server 1170 need not reside in the web servers 1132. Instead, as will be described with reference to Figure 45, the proxy server 1170 may reside in the CMIDS 1140, the back-end server component.

The database 1172 generally maintains information needed to translate the messages to and from che SCP host 1110. A message translation program written in 4GL accesses the database 1172 when a message transaction is received. The program translates the message and sends the message to the SCP host 1110 for processing. After the message has been processed, the program translates the response and sends it back to the message manager 1156. The proxy server 1170 typically invokes an instance of the translation program for each message transaction it receives and processes. As noted above with reference to the proxy

-265SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 server, the database 1172 may also alternately reside in the CMIDS with the proxy server.

In the first embodiment, a data server, i.e., the CMIDS, is included. In this embodiment, much of the functions of the proxy server are performed within the data server. More specifically, the proxy server 1170 and the database 1172 may be ported over to the CMIDS 1140. The web server 1172 communicates to the proxy in the CMIDS 1140 which then communicates with the SCP host. The call manager integrated data server (CMIDS) 1140 generally services web requests for the webstation application and serves as a front-end for the SCP host 1110. Referring back to Figure 41, the CMIDS 1140, in addition, provides data storage and management for data resident on the SCP host 1110, the IR host 1112, and/or other servers. The CMIDS 1140 also provides pass through connectivity for rules writing and other provisioning from the client webstation 1130 to the SCP host 1110. The CMIDS includes databases 1142a-c and provides an interface 1162 to the call manager SCP host 1110 for rules writing and list management. CMIDS databases 1142a-c are extracted or replicated from the SCP host 1110 and/or the IR host 1112. The SCP host 1110 services are typically requested and satisfied through a protocol known as man machine language (MML) commands. The CMIDS 1140 utilizes MML as well as other interface mechanisms supported by the SCP host 1110. The call manager integrated data server (CMIDS) 1140 physically resides on hardware located behind the intranet firewall 25(b) as shown.

-266SÜBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

The proxy server 1170 and the database 1172 which were described with reference to the web server 1132, may reside in the CMIDS 1140. In addition, the CMIDS 1140 may also include a session manager and associated session table for managing host sessions. As described above, the proxy server 1170 generally handles webstation client 20 requests passed from the web servers 1132 by accepting message transactions from the webstation client 20 via the web servers 1132, maintains logging information, sends the request to a session manager, and receives data from the back-end and forwards it to the web servers 1132. In addition the proxy server 1170 may accept messages originating from the Nexus client workstations (1126 at Figure 40), and perform user logon validations for the Nexus client workstation 1126. The Nexus client transactions, with the exception of the user logons, are passed directly to the SCP host 1110 for processing via a Nexus port manager (not shown).

The session manager 1158, residing in the CMIDS 1140, receives data from the proxy server 1170. The session manager 1158 updates the sessions table 1160, validates that the user has proper privilege to perform the task and determines whether the transaction originated from a webstation 1130 or a Nexus client 1126. The user validation function may be performed for the webstation client 20 also, in addition to a validation conducted by the networkMCI Interact StarOE authentication and entitlement system during the session logon.

-267SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 ‘

CMIDS 1140 also may include a Nexus host formatter, a CMIDS transaction manager, and a Nexus port manager. The session manager 1158 typically passes a transaction request received from the web server 1132 to either the Nexus host formatter, or the CMID transaction manager. The Nexus host formatter module services transactions requiring SCP host services to fulfill the request. If the transaction originated from a Nexus client workstation 1126, the MML command message is adjusted to use a selected generic id for access to the SCP host 1110. If the transaction originated from a webstation client 20, the request is translated to the correct MML format. When the message is prepared, it is then sent to the Nexus host port manager component.

The CMIDS transaction manager module services transactions that do not require the SCP host 1110,

i.e., the types of client request which may be serviced locally on CMIDS, including: obtaining NEMS alarm information, obtaining GDD information, and processing of user security. When the local processing is complete, results are sent back to the proxy server 1170 component.

The Nexus port manager component of the CMIDS manages pools of session with one or more SCP hosts 1110. The Nexus port manager logs onto each session in a pool using a generic user id. Using a generic user id enables each session to access an individual user's data without having to log each user onto the SCP host 1110. MML commands for a particular user are sent to a SCP host using any available session in the

-268SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCI7US98/20173 pool of generic session. After an MML command is sent and a response is received, the session is returned to the session pool and freed for use by the succeeding transactions. A session pool is defined as a set of sessions connected to one particular SCP host 1110. Therefore, the Nexus port manager component of CMIDS 1140 supports multiple session pools for communicating with multiple SCP hosts 1110.

The Nexus port manager also maintains state of each session in each pool. The Nexus port manager generates a keep-alive-message whenever a session is idle to keep the SCP host 1110 connection from being dropped. If a session in a pool has failed, the Nexus port manager will try to reestablish the session and add it back into the pool when establishment is completed. The Nexus port manager determines the communication channel to use to access the SCP host 1110 and keeps a number of connections open to the host 1110. Each message is sent to the SCP host 1110 and the channel blocked until a response is received.

Figure 45 is an example of a CMIDS conceptual model 1140 providing details of the CMIDS software components. The components perform specific functionalities of the back-end which will also be described with reference to Figure 46. The CMIDS software architecture includes proxy 1148, proxy, system administration, and inbox components applicable to the call manager webstation (CMWS) application.

The CMWS proxy 1148 is generally a logical internal software entity which verifies application access and interfaces with host application. Depending

-269SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 on the application access chosen by the customer, either the networkMCI Interact dispatcher or the CMWS web server 1132 communicates client transactions to the CMWS proxy 1148. The networkMCI Interact, as described herein, typically accepts the encrypted customer request from the networkMCI Interact web server cluster, and it interfaces with a CMWS proxy. The user account interface software component 1143 generally maintains sessions with the SCP hosts and provides the functions of the Nexus port manager described above. The report handler process generally maintains databases 1142a-c and provides reporting facilities. The CMIDS back-end interface 1191 supports a number interface mechanisms including MML and command line access to the Nexus SCP host, common alarm and logging services, and data retrieval from the IR host.

The call manager webstation back-end

As described generally above, the back-end is responsible for transmitting web client request to the SCP host and delivering the host reply information back to the web clients. For supporting the request/reply transmissions, the back-end system of the present invention generally includes three logical components: front-end interface (BFI), translate/data manager (TDM), and back-end to Nexus, i.e., SCP host interface (BNI) . it should be noted that SCP host functionality is currently implemented on the Nexus, hence the acronym, BNI. However, other host systems are not precluded as having capability to support the SCP host •270SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 functionality for the purposes of the call manager webstation system of the present invention.

Figure 46 illustrates a back-end process flow 1200 for the system of the present invention. A customer 1122 typically dials a toll-free number. As an illustrative example, this toll-free number may be provided by a company having operators taking telephone orders, in addition, the company provides three trunk lines or destination identifiers going into its ACD. The company services a call centered media-based sales application, e.g., home shopping network through this ACD which includes a toll-free number for customers to call. To handle calls to the home shopping network client, the company sets up an ACD path group called HSN. This ACD path group includes the three trunk lines as member destinations and reports agent and call statistics from the total number of agents servicing home shopping network, regardless of the particular trunk lines.

Accordingly, as shown at step 1241, when the customer 1122 dials the toll-free number, the call goes to the network through the switch. At step 1242, the call is passed from the switch to the DAP for translation. The DAP translates the toll-free number to a network number and maps it to an address readable by the RDG. NetCap 290 generally houses routing plans, destination labels, toll-free numbers, logical terminations, DAP-based details and trigger plans required for the call manager webstation system. Most of this data may be provisioned in NetCap 290 via the Toll Free Network Manager (TFNM) application service,

-271SUBSTTTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 as described herein. Seeing the trigger point and other DAP-based data provisioned from NetCap 290, the DAP passes the call to the RDG at step 1243. At step 1244, call statistics are saved in DAP traffic statistics (DTS) for use in case of time-out or other failures. They are also stored within the IR host. At step 1245, the RDG, with its ability to communicate with the SCP host, passes the network number and associated address to the call-by-call (CxC) routing application on the SCP host. Based on instructions in the rule set defined by the call manager webstation system customer, the CxC application selects the HSN ACD path group at step 1246. At step 1247, CxC application then selects the individual destination identifier within the ACD path based on the specified distribution method which may be either even/round robin or directed/percentage distribution. At step 1248, the call is routed back through the RDG to the DAP. Then at step 1249, the DAP routes the call to the ACD via the specified destination id or trunk. Specifically, referring back to the above illustrated example, calls received on Thursdays between 5:00 and 7:00 GMT may be set to be routed to Orlando, and accordingly the destination id is Orlando Central. The CxC routing application returns destination id Orlando Central to the network, which routes the call to the ACD via the Orlando Central destination id or trunk.

Call manager client GUI application implementation

As in the other nMCI Internet network management client applications, the call manager client

-272SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 application (CMApp) is preferably derived from the (common object) COApp class and may be launched by a backplane object that is typically derived from the COBackPlane class, including the networkMCI Interact backplane (Figure 3).

In one embodiment of the present invention, the call manager client application is launched in a separate browser window from the one within which the networkMCI Interact backplane is running. For example, after validating that a customer's profile allows access to the call manager application, and after a customer clicks the call manager icon 97 on the networkMCI Interact home page (Figure 5 (b)), the networkMCI Interact backplane creates a separate browser window and populates the call manager webstation URL. The call manager webstation web server then downloads the call manager client application for execution within the new browser window. The call manager client application downloaded from the server includes a CMBackPlane class which is an applet derived and inherits from the COBackPlane class. The CMBackPlane is launched with the call manager webstation web page and provides backplane functionalities within the context of the call manager webstation application. The call manager client application also includes a aFeature class from which the CMFeature is derived. The CMFeature typically is invoked by the CMApp and provides an application specific functionality within the call manager application such as reporting, alarm management (NEM) ,

-273SUBSTÏTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCTZUS98/20173 graphical data display (GDD), and call by call application (CxC).

Upon the call manager application launch and initialization, the main toolbar sets its icon. For example, the browser starts the backplane applet which launches the CMApp by calling its init method. The CMApp calls seticon method for setting up an icon for the main toolbar. The main toolbar may be implemented using a view of a model in a MVC paradigm described above, when a user presses a button on the main toolbar to launch a feature, e.g., NEMS, Rules, Provisioning, etc., the CMAppView derived from the theMainToolbar class creates/activates the selected feature and initializes it. When the CMFeature is instantiated or started, it invokes a seticon method to create a frame, the CMFeatureFrame, in which to run the selected feature.

Call manager webstation client application features

As described above, the call manager webstation application allows authorized customers to manage their ACD data networks via a web-based interface. Specifically, customers are enabled to provision hierarchies for their business; control all routing of their toll-free traffic; create, modify or delete agent pools; manipulate capacity tables; and define quota schemes, value lists and schedule tables.

In the manner as described herein, a customer at a client webstation 20 having internet connectivity and a web browser, and after logon, is presented with the networkMCI Interact home page [Figure 5(b)] downloaded

-274SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 from the web server. With downloading and presenting of the home page, the web browser at the webstation 20, deploys a backplane applet via which the call manager GUI client application is invoked. The backplane requests a list of authorized applications from the StarOE authentication and entitlement system for the networkMCI Interact platform and a select list of applications which may include the call manager webstation application, is enabled on the home page according to the customer specific entitlements. The call manager webstation application is then accessed from the home page [Figure 5(b)] .

The customer may be presented with a call manager webstation application logon dialog box, in which the customer enters the call manager webstation logon name and password. In addition, the customer may be presented with a change password dialog. This dialog implements a password expiration design feature, which due to security reasons, the customer must change after a predetermined period of time. In addition, multiple hosts may be handled through the web client front-end and translation processing at the back-end. The frontend client application sends the get-nexus-host command to retrieve a list of SCP host names. The host information is stored at the back-end with the Informix database and, typically an SQL routine retrieves the available Nexus SCP host machines. The proxy residing at the back-end returns a list of the available Nexus SCP host machines to the front-end web GUI client application. The proxy generally maintains a hosts list having SCP host names and their IP addresses.

-275SUBSTÎTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT7US98/20173

Maintaining the list of host names on the proxy allows for easy modification of host names and IP addresses with no impact to the client code.

When the front-end web GUI client application receives the list, a list of host names may be displayed in a drop-down list for the customer to select, or the customer may be prompted for the Nexus SCP host machine desired. The selected host name is sent along with a login transaction having user name/password to the back-end, when the customer clicks a login button from the login dialog. The establish-session command is then sent to the backend where the proxy may open a connection to that host. The proxy maps the SCP host name to the appropriate IP address and forwards the user login request to the host. The SCP host id selected at login is populated in the toolbar (Figure 48 at 1880) at the client webstation.

An application-level process flow 1250 for the CMWS system is now presented in view of Figure 47. After an entered login name is validated by StarOE and user entitlements ascertained, the call manager webstation applet is downloaded to the customer webstation 1130, and as indicated at step 1254, the customer is presented with the screen 1870 shown in Figure 48 through which the customer may perform the call manager features of the present invention provided. These features include: manipulating user and business hierarchy by querying, creating, or editing user id records as shown at steps 1256 and 1258; managing routing schemes via the call by call

-276SUBSTTTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT7US98/20I73 application as shown at steps 1260 and 1262a-k; invoking alarm manager at step 1264 and 1266 to view problems occurring across the call manager components, such as loss of connectivity, failure of ACD data collection, system failures, and application abnormalities; reporting and data extracts at steps 1268, 1270 for printing, displaying and managing ACD statistics, alarm history, database usage, peg counter, and system performance; and graphic data display at steps 1272, 1274 for viewing histograms and charts of ACD and peg-count statistics.

More specifically, by selecting the option at step 1256, to manage a user and business hierarchy, via, e.g., the security button 1882 (Figure 48) from the toolbar 1880 (Figure 48), a customer may search for a user id and, with appropriate privileges, create or edit a user id for a business level below their own. Through this option the customer may also access reporting visibility to all data items belonging to the customer and any business level below their own. In addition, the customer may assign a read, read/write, or no access privileges to each function in the user id profile. Moreover, the customers may administer and modify limits on the number of entities that a business unit may own in the provisioning database.

By selecting the call by call application at step 1260, for example, by clicking on an icon labeled Provisioning (Figure 48 at 1874) on the call manager web station tool bar displayed on the screen 1870 in Figure 48, the customer may perforin business hierarchy provisioning as shown at step 1262a. The customer may

-277SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 select the option at step 1262b and perform loadbalancing by determining the degree of busyness by tracking the average call handling time, the number of agents, and the number of calls routed to each destination. At steps 1262c and 1262e, the customer is enabled to provision capacity tables for providing a default staffing allocation for use by the load balancing algorithm. With the CxC option and shown at step 1262d, the customer may also provision basic destination ids representing a single call termination on the network which may be a single telephone instrument or a line termination into a PBX.

Destination ids with ACD feeds, which may represent a single call termination into an ACD, may also be provisioned. Provisioning of ACD path groups representing a set of destination ids that terminate on the same physical ACD and share the same statistical data feed is also enabled. Provisioning of Destination Groups representing a set of logically related destination ids and/or ACD path groups is possible via the CxC option. Destination Groups are a convenience mechanism for writing rules that refer to multiple destinations without having to list each destination separately. In addition, the customer may provision distribution methods, e.g., even, which is a roundrobin selection of destination ids or directed, in which the calls are routed to destination ids based on a percentage allotted to each destination id.

At step 1262f, quota customers to specify and maintain call routing quotas for destinations. At step 1262g, the customer is enabled to provision called

-278SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 numbers. For example, the customer creates a rule set associated with the called number. The rule set typically determines the location of the caller and selects the appropriate destination number for the nearest warehouse. At step 1262h, the customer may provision value lists which are sets of related numeric values. They are typically used in rule sets to test the attributes of an incoming call to determine a characteristic of the call or caller. An attribute of the call (such as the ANI) is tested against a value list. If the value of the call attribute matches an entry in the value list, then other rules are executed based on this logical condition. This feature is highly useful for non-English-speaking callers. At step 1262i, the customer may provision translation tables. The translation tables include a highly flexible mechanism for performing a table lookup and returning a value that corresponds with the search argument. At steps 1262j and 1262k, the customers may maintain user variables such as setting up names for peg counters and rule variables and routing instructions.

By selecting the alarm manager option at step 1264, for example, by clicking on an icon labeled NEMS (Figure 48 at 1872) on the call manager web station tool bar displayed on the screen 1870 in Figure 48, the customer may display various alarms for problems occurring across the call manager components. These components were described above. Typically, alarming is performed through the BMC patrol software agents with monitoring provided by the system

-279SUBSTÎTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 operational support (SOS) organization, which monitors other components of the call manager platform.

Patrol's logwatch.cinfig allows setting up a file name and a selection string. Patrol agents typically monitor the file and pass alarms matching the selection string to the web clients. For logging application level alarms, a UNIX syslog facility is used. A set of send-alarm functions interfaced between the application processes and syslog daemon is added to a common utility library. Through the send-alarm function the call manager application processes send the alarm messages to the same log file with different levels of severity. The alarms with high level of severity is generally monitored by system operational support (SOS) organization through BMC patrol software. Each alarm message typically includes a process name, an alarm number, and a severity level. A typical alarm message looks like: Apr 8 17:23:31 cmjwstest Process Name [Process PID]:[LOG_Alert Number] can't set up a connection to XXX Nexus at Line 65 File proxy. The alert number then may be used to determine possible solutions.

Referring back to Figure 47, selecting the reporting and data extracts option at step 1268, for example, by clicking on an icon labeled Reporting (Figure 48 at 1876) on the call manager web station tool bar displayed on the screen 1870 in Figure 48, enables the customer to obtain reports of ACD statistics, alarm history, database usage, CDR extracts. Peg counters, and system performance. Each of these reports may be generated on-line or by a print

-280SUBSTÎTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 function within the application. The ACD statistics are monitored in live, near-real-time by the SCP Host application. A load-balancing algorithm uses ACD statistics to determine the busy-ness of a destination. When an ACD Path Group is selected as the least busy location by the load-balancing algorithm, one of the individual destination ids within that ACD path group is picked to carry the call. The reports of alarm history permit the customer to view the status of alarms and events on the various hosts. An alarm or event may be an informational message sent autonomously from a host. Database usage reports generally provide information on users, typically by user id, accessing a workstation, SCP host, or CxC application. CDR extracts generally provide a database record of call detail record information about a called number translation query and its outcome of the routing translation process. Peg counters generally represent a series of accumulators that are available to the user for counting actions or situations encountered in a rule set. System performance reports allow the customer at a workstation (webstation) to monitor capacity of the host and application components to foresee and prevent possible outages.

Selecting the graphic data display option at step 1272, for example, by clicking on an icon labeled GDD (Figure 48 at 1878) on the call manager web station tool bar displayed on the screen 1870, enables the customer to obtain and view histogram, chart, and line graph displays of ACD-based statistics and routing peg

-281SUBSTTTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 counts, which may be refreshed as frequently as once per minute.

Rules writing, testing, debugging application features

The rules feature (Figure 48 at 1884} allows users to write rules for routing of toll free calls. Rules may load balance based on call center capacity and route based on automatic number identification (ANI), caller entered digits (CED), or quotas. Via this feature, users may also test, install, uninstall, and swap rules as shown at Figure 48. The bottom half of screen 1870 in Figure 48 displays a typical rules writing/editing template. The users may build rules on the rules construction area 1882 by including statements selected from the constructs list box and the statements list box 1884. The users may also select various options 1886 available for the selected construct or statement for building the rule.

For enabling a rule writer to test a rule set, the rules feature provides a rules debugger/tester functionality which runs a rule set against a set of test data, i.e., call context, simulating call scenarios in which to test a rule set logic. This optional facility allows rule writers to check if their rule set exhibits the expected behavior, for example, before installing the rule set on the network. Moreover, because this test feature is purely optional, a rule writer need not run the rule testing functionality before the rule is installed.

When a customer, e.g., a rule writer, selects the debugger/tester feature option, a rules testing dialog

-282SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 appears. Via this dialog, a user may define a call context parameters for simulating call scenarios in which to test a rule set logic. The basic call context includes called-number, ANI, CED, carrier, date and time of the call. Optionally, the user may also modify the different parameters of destinations and quotas that may affect the load balancing.

In addition, an option to allow the database to be updated during the simulation is also provided. During the testing process, the customer may step through the simulation one line at a time or choose a Run command to run through the entire call all at once. Furthermore, during the simulation, the customer may select from various view tabs to view, including, a log view, a destination status view, a destination details view, a CDR view and a user variable view.

For executing the testing process, the debugger/tester uses the MML interface to Nexus, i.e., the debugger/tester formulates the user actions to one or more MML commands and sends the translated command to the SCP host. The SCP host typically stores the state of testing (including the different views of the log), and manages the test execution.

System status display

Typically, a system status display 185Û shown in Figure 49, is opened by selecting System Status Display from the security button on the main toolbar (Figure 48 at 1882). The dialog is non-modal having a top half having a dialog 1852 including general information about the system, and, a bottom half

-283SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCTZUS98/20173 including a combination box 1854 that allows the user to select between the different options described above, i.e: application status, ACD gateway status, partner links status, signaling network links status, and webstation session links status. Selecting an option displays a list including information relevant to that option. As shown at 1854, selection the application status displays information including application names 1856, instance numbers 1858, desired states 970, actual states 1862, release numbers 1864 and TPS 1866. Similarly, selecting the ACD gateway status option displays information including gateway names, gateway states, gateway link states, collector link states, and dates/times of last change. Selecting the partner links status option displays host names, states, link states, sync states information. Likewise the signaling network links status option displays information which includes linkset names, link names, states, dates/times of last change, and adjacent point codes. Selecting the Webstation session links status option displays information such as workstation instance numbers, locations, states, user ids, and dates/times of last change.

When a message prompting user readiness is received by the host, the host sends system status messages on a regular interval. The length of the interval may vary anywhere from every second to every minute. The system status display messages are automatically sent from the SCP host, once the messages are turned on. The backend typically stores this type of message received from the SCP host until the client

-284SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 queries for it. A unique set of data is stored for each user currently performing a system status display. Subsequent messages received from the SCP host typically overwrite previous data.

The host administration functions

A user may select to perform host administrations by selecting the appropriate icon from the main tool bar (Figure 48). In response, a pull-down menu from is presented with options including: a backup option for backing up server database to a user-selectable back-up medium, e.g., tape or a disk; an ACD gateway administration option for providing users with the ability to view, create, delete and edit ACD gateways; an ACD collector administration option for providing the user with the ability to view, create, delete and edit ACD collectors; a FMS gateway administration option for providing the ability to view, create, delete and edit FMS gateways; and FMS collector administration for providing the ability to view, create, delete and edit FMS collectors.

When the ACD collector administration option is selected, a dialog 1870 shown in Figure 50 opens with a list of retrieved gateway types. Typically the client GUI application sends two messages to retrieve information needed to populate the dialog box 1870. A rtrv-acd-type is used to fill the gateway type combo box 1872. A rtrv-acd-status is sent to retrieve information 1874 on the selected gateway type. Clicking a row in the list 1874 of enables the delete button. Typing characters into the site collector name

-285SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

1878 enables the Add button 1879. The FMS administration dialogs share the same dialog box with the above described ACD gateway and collector administration functionalities. The same messages,

i.e., the rtrv-acd-type, and the rtrv-acd-status,^ware sent to the back-end but with different parameter types, e.g., FSM or ACD.

Company branding

The CMWS component of the nMCI Interact system supports a branding functionality which allows users to open the call manager webstation application in a company specific context.

Language support

The CMWS component of the nMCI Interact system additionally provides an internationalization feature, supporting local languages for text displays. This optional feature allows a user to open the call manager application in a language as set by the user. Subsequent texts and phrases are rendered in the language chosen. Typically, the call manager webstation application is opened with a default language as set by the operating system. The user is also given an option to select a language other than the default, A call manager applet typically determines the locale set for the operating system and launches the appropriate language version by including the locale as a parameter. For example, the parameter with a name locale may have one of the following values: en_US^ff for English US, en_CA for English-286SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

Canada, and fr_CA for French Canada. The applet uses this value to set the locale for the system string and phrase resources. A CMResource class handles the general resources of character encoding, numeric formatting and date formatting.

Online invoicing

Another application of the suite of telecommunications network management applications is an online invoicing system, herein referred to as Clientview, which provides customers with the ability to view invoices and reports online, and offers a facility for printing and faxing documents. The online invoicing system takes information available from different billing systems and incorporates that information into its database for subsequent retrieval and presentation to a user according to user-specified requests. A general block diagram illustrating the online invoicing system architecture 1300, integrated with the networkMCI Interact platform, is shown in Figure 51. Generally, as shown in Figure 51, the Clientview system 1300 is integrated within the nMCI Interact system comprising: the user web browser 1320 which employs a Clientview GUI 1330 for providing an interface to which a customer may request and view various billing invoices associated with the application services subscribed by the customer and provided by the networkMCI Interact system via a secure socket connection for presentation of invoice reports. For example, using the GUI client application 20, customers may drill down on their applicable invoices,

-287SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 typically accessing them via the given customer identifiers such as the corp id, bill payer, or mega account numbers. The invoice reports may also be available for various application services including toll free, Frame Relay, and ATM; StarWRS client-side report viewer and requestor processes 200 which provides the support for generating and presenting reports relating to the conditions of the customer's dedicated voice and data networks as described herein; a corresponding server side reporting component having the above described inbox, report scheduler and report manager components, in addition to alarm and report viewer and requestor components implementing Java applets having viewer classes that enable the downloading and display of reports generated from Clientview server processes 1350.

Also shown as part of the online invoicing invoice viewing system architecture 1300 of Figure 51 is the Web server/dispatcher component 1335 which provides for the transport between the Web browser and an online invoicing proxy interface 1340 including all secure communications and encryption. Thus, customer requests and server responses may be communicated from the user browser 1320 to the online invoicing server 1350 in a secure manner. Specifically, the dispatcher 1335 forwards user requests, such as get index message for retrieving a list of documents available for viewing by a customer, to the online invoicing server 1350 process that employs an integrated proxy application 1340 for receiving and interpreting the user messages and performing the online invoicing functionality. This

-288SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 proxy capability includes a multithreaded engine enabling multiple, simultaneously executing sessions supporting anticipated user load. The interface between the dispatcher server 1335 and the online invoicing server 1350 is also message-based, employing, e.g., TCP/IP socket transport, and, as will be described, a messaging protocol that is defined and which includes a generic message header followed by proxy-specific data. The same process of messaging scheme is employed in the other direction. That is, the online invoicing proxy 1340 sends the generic header, followed by the proxyspecific response back to the dispatch server 1335 for communications over the firewall and back to the user browser 20.

The online invoicing proxy 1340 uses the networkMCI Interact platform's template proxy as an implementation of the listener/slave portion of the proxy. The proxy 1340 passively listens on a previously defined port number and forks a process on an interrupt basis, after which the parent proxy continues to listen for other request. The forked process is generally dedicated to handling the detected requests. The forked process detects a transaction type from the proxy protocol header. The transaction types generally include synchronous, asynchronous, and bulk transfer, as described above. The proxy 1340 then calls a back-end function whose function is dependent on the transaction type detected. The back-end functions typically provide individual services for which the application is responsible.

-289SUBST1TUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

For example, if the transaction type for a detected request is of synch type, the forked process executes the synch back-end function and passes the request as an argument. The synch back-end function generally passes the request to a CICS task on the online invoicing server and waits for a response. More specifically, the synch function first establishes a CICS task via a direct TCP/IP socket connection to the CICS TCP/IP interface service. The synch function then waits for a response indicating whether a connection was successfully established or an error occurred. If an error is occurred, an error response from the CICS task is returned to the synch function, which then terminates appropriately.

If a connection to the CICS task is successfully established, the request is sent to the task and the synch function waits on a response. The response is generally preceded with a preamble block, indicating the status of request and the number of bytes to follow. The preamble block may include an error code, indicating error conditions that may have occurred during the CICS task processing. Certain error indications may prompt the synch function to terminate the CICS task connection, and also to exit the synch function.

If the preamble block indicates that the request was successfully processed, the preamble block is returned, and the byte count specified in the preamble block is piped from the CICS task, to the requesting process, and typically all the way back to the client GUI application. Upon completion of piping the data,

-290SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 the synch function disconnects the CICS task and exits. The forked process which called the synch function also terminates itself by exiting.

In the preferred embodiment, the online invoicing server 1350 stores documents from various billing systems and performs the various database queries and function calls in response to requests received from the customer via the online invoicing proxy 1340. Particularly, the online invoicing server 1350 is responsible for tasks including data collection, calculation, storage, and report generation. A more detailed description of the server 1350 is provided with reference to Figures 55 and 56.

During its operation, the online invoicing server 1350 supports communications with the StarOE server 39 which provides for authentication of users, supplying of entitlement information, and enabling order entry for the various online invoicing invoice viewing services order entry functions including functionality necessary to manage (create, update, delete) online invoicing users, and feed the appropriate order entry information to the online invoicing server 1350 in order to properly associate the appropriate online invoicing functionality and data to the right customer once given admission to the online invoicing invoice viewing service.

As described previously, order entry for the networkMCI Interact browser and all applications on networkMCI may be made through the networkMCI StarOE order entry system. The online invoicing application service may be ordered for all business markets

-291SUBSTFTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 customers. For example, a user may select to have online invoicing invoices for a given enterprise, corp, bill payer, and/or mega account number. These include all NCBS, Toll Free, PLBS, and Mega invoices. In addition, selections may include invoice images for MCI CVNS-ROW, MCI CVNS-Mexico, MCI CVNS-Canada as well as Stentor Advantage Vnet/CVNS invoice images.

In the preferred embodiment, a messaging interface is utilized between the StarOE 39 and the online invoicing server 1350 for communications means. The online invoicing server 1350, typically functions as a client and receives authentication information, billing ids, and level of service information, which may also be supplied in response to the launch of the online invoicing GUI client application 1330. For example, when online invoicing client application 1330 is launched from the home page [Figure 5(b)], a customer identifier such as the userid and the applicable corp ids and mega account numbers may be retrieved by the order entry system administration server, StarOE 39, and passed to the online invoicing server. The online invoicing server then makes the necessary association to individual bill payers that the user is authorized to view. The view of invoices may include a particular portion of the invoice as well as the entire invoice.

The online invoicing server 1350 also may interact with the StarWRS inbox server 270 by storing the news information regarding the online invoicing service, in addition to the event notifications, and report data from the networkMCI Interact application services.

-292SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173

In addition, the invoice files saved on the inbox may be retrieved and viewed using the report requestor 212 and the report viewer 215 components of StarWRS 200 (Figure 10) residing in the user browser 20. Via the report requestor, the customer may request tailored reports regarding the invoice files and view or print the customized invoice reports displayed by the report viewer as described herein.

An application-level process flow 1360 for the Clientview system is now presented in view of Figure 52. After successful logon and entitlement determination (by StarOE server), and upon selection of the online invoice (Clientview) application from the downloaded networkMCI Interact homepage to the user [Figure 5(b)], a Clientview applet is invoked at step 1362 to display an online invoice screen at the customer workstation. As indicated at step 1364, the user then enters the customer identifiers on the online invoice screen which are then checked against the available list of customer identifiers in the online invoice server's database at step 1368. If the customer identifier does not exist or is not a valid type at step 1370, the user is prompted to re-enter the identifier at step 1365. When the customer identifier is properly validated, the user is presented with the online invoicing products associated with the customer identifier at step 1372. The user then may select products by their date ranges at step 1374 for viewing. At step 1376, a server module then retrieves a list of document based on the selected product and date range from the online invoicing database, and at step 1378,

-293SUBSTÎTUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCTAJS98/20173 the list is presented to the user, from which the user may select to view a document, at step 1380. Upon the user selection, the server modules retrieve the document from the database at step 1382. At step 1384, the invoice and/or report documents are presented to the user at the user's workstation. At step 1836, the user may scroll through, or print the data presented, or the user may, at step 1388, select to view another document at step 1378.

The information stored in the database 1355 generally originate from different billing systems. When data is available from these billing systems, the online invoicing server typically performs a conversion process and stores the converted data on tape until an audit approval. When the converted data is audited and approved, the data having the invoicing documents are stored to the database 1355. After the data has been stored in the database for a predetermined period, it may be moved from a direct access storage device (DASD) and stored on optical platters. These platters may remain in an optical jukebox for another predetermined period and then migrated to an optical shelf where the data may be available for a certain period.

Having described generally, an overview of the online invoicing application service and its integration with the networkMCI Interact's network and data infrastructure, the specific functionalities of the online invoicing application, namely the online invoicing GUI application on the client platform side and the online invoicing server in the enterprise Intranet, will now be described in detail below.

-294SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173

Online invoicing GUI application

As in the other nMCI Internet network management client applications, the online invoicing client application is implemented in Java to ensure platform independence and particularly is developed in accordance with many of the networkMCI Interact's common objects, as described herein, for achieving interoperability with the application backplane.

The client component of the online invoicing includes a client interface for the user to select what data co retrieve. The data is then retrieved through various application processing, and a list of invoices and reports are provided for the user to choose from for online viewing. When a customer clicks on the online invoice icon 99 cn the home page [Figure 5(b)], after a proper authentication via a logon, the customer is presented with a criteria screen 1900 as shown in Figure 53(a) from which the customer may specify various types of, and date ranges for, invoices desired, e.g., Vnet invoices and the Concert Cross Border Reporting. The criteria screen 1900 is divided into a customer identifier section 1902, products section 1910, and dates section 1912. The customer identifier type includes identification by corporate id 1906, account id, bill payer id, and/or mega id. Each online invoicing user is given at least one identifier type 1906 and a customer identifier number 1908 associated with the type at the time of order entry via the StarOE. The StarOE maintains this customer information and communicates the information to the online invoicing GUI application, when the application

-295SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 is invoked by the backplane applet. Accordingly, at the same time the online invoicing GUI application displays the criteria screen 1900, it also populates the identifier type 1906 and customer identifier 1908 fields automatically as received from the StarOE user authentication and entitlement system.

The user may then select a desired identifier type from the list of identifier types shown at 1906. The online invoicing GUI application then automatically fills in the customer identifier field 1908 associated with the identifier type selected. In addition, if the customer's last selection was made with a certain type, e.g., corp id, the next time the customer views the criteria screen 1900, the corp id identifier type will be selected automatically. After selecting a desired identifier, the user typically then may execute the search of invoices available for that identifier by clicking on the retrieve button 1904, pressing an enter key, or using a fast key combination such as Alt+S.

The products and dates sections 1910, 1912 are used for displaying the service products for which invoice viewing is available for a given customer identifier type and the date range for the available invoices. When the user executes the search, the products field 1910 is filled in with the date ranges 1912, indicating available invoice reports for various period ranges. For retrieving invoice documents, the user may select ranges of dates including multiple ranges of dates as shown, and then click on the retrieve button 1904, press enter, use the fast key

-296SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803 PCT/US98/20173 combination Alt+R, or click on any area within the date range list box 1912.

Upon executing the retrieve user command, the online invoicing GUI application displays the screen 1915 shown at Figure 53(b) listing the report documents. For each document, date, invoice number, bill payer id, and number of pages are displayed as shown in screen display 1915. The status bar 1917 at the bottom of the screen may display a number of indices (document lists) loaded. The number of indices which may be loaded at one time may be configurable by a customer via the online invoicing GUI application. An invoice report listed then may be selected and retrieved by clicking on the retrieve button 1904, pressing an enter key or double clicking on a highlighted item 1918, or using a fast key combination such as alt+R. when a selection is entered, a page range selection box 1920 appears. The selection box 1920 allows customers to enter in the desired page range for viewing. The mail/payment option 1922 for retrieving only the remittance pages without having to retrieve additional invoice pages, is available from this screen.

Figure 54 illustrates a sample invoice document 1925 retrieved when an invoice item is selected from a screen 1915 shown at Figure 53(b). Using the menu bar 1927 or a tool bar 1928, a customer may access the following functions: open a saved document; save the current document; print the current document; fax the current document; Batch Print a document; Search the document for word(s); display the first downloaded

-297SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173 ’ page; display the previous page; display the next page; display the last downloaded page; Go to a specified page; increase the font size of the displayed document; reset the font of the displayed document to the default; decrease the font size of the displayed document; and, return to the screen that invoked the document.

With more particularity, the batch print option may allow customers to send a batch print job to be performed at the enterprise Intranet to the customers, e.g., via Federal Express, at a location specified by the customer.

Another feature provided by the Clientview system 1300 includes an accumulator function which allows customers to add up numerical figures, such as minutes and charges, by highlighting the numbers directly on the screen.

The above-mentioned fax current document option offered by the online invoicing application includes an ability to fax to the customer, at a customer specified location, a current page, specified range of pages, or the entire document by making an appropriate selection in a fax dialog box.

Online invoicing server

As described above, the online invoicing provides on-line visibility to various networkMCI Interact documents. In presenting various documents online to a customer, the GUI client application communicates to a online invoicing server via the proxy for retrieving up-to-date information which the server maintains.

-298SUBSTITUTE SHEET (RULE 26)

CA 02304543 2000-03-24 î ί

DEMANDES OU BREVETS VOLUMINEUX

LA PRÉSENTE PARTIE DE CETTE DEMANDE OU CE BREVET COMPREND PLUS D'UN TOME.

CECI EST LE TOME J__DE Ά.

NOTE: Pour les tomes addîtionels, veuillez contacter le Bureau canadien des brevets

JUMBO APPLICATIONS/PATENTS

THIS SECTION OF THE APPUCAT1ON/PATENT CONTAINS MORE THAN ONE VOLUME

THIS IS VOLUME ___OF____

NOTE: For additional volumespiease contact'thé Canadian Patent Office

CA 02304543 2000-03-24

WO 99/19803

PCT/US98/20173